[go: up one dir, main page]
More Web Proxy on the site http://driver.im/

US20170233433A1 - Compositions and methods for treating cns disorders - Google Patents

Compositions and methods for treating cns disorders Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20170233433A1
US20170233433A1 US15/519,478 US201515519478A US2017233433A1 US 20170233433 A1 US20170233433 A1 US 20170233433A1 US 201515519478 A US201515519478 A US 201515519478A US 2017233433 A1 US2017233433 A1 US 2017233433A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
compound
alkyl
formula
disorder
hydrogen
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US15/519,478
Inventor
Gabriel MARTINEZ BOTELLA
Francesco G. Salituro
Albert J. Robichaud
Boyd L. Harrison
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Sage Therapeutics Inc
Original Assignee
Sage Therapeutics Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Sage Therapeutics Inc filed Critical Sage Therapeutics Inc
Priority to US15/519,478 priority Critical patent/US20170233433A1/en
Publication of US20170233433A1 publication Critical patent/US20170233433A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07JSTEROIDS
    • C07J43/00Normal steroids having a nitrogen-containing hetero ring spiro-condensed or not condensed with the cyclopenta(a)hydrophenanthrene skeleton
    • C07J43/003Normal steroids having a nitrogen-containing hetero ring spiro-condensed or not condensed with the cyclopenta(a)hydrophenanthrene skeleton not condensed
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/56Compounds containing cyclopenta[a]hydrophenanthrene ring systems; Derivatives thereof, e.g. steroids
    • A61K31/58Compounds containing cyclopenta[a]hydrophenanthrene ring systems; Derivatives thereof, e.g. steroids containing heterocyclic rings, e.g. danazol, stanozolol, pancuronium or digitogenin
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/0012Galenical forms characterised by the site of application
    • A61K9/0019Injectable compositions; Intramuscular, intravenous, arterial, subcutaneous administration; Compositions to be administered through the skin in an invasive manner
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/0012Galenical forms characterised by the site of application
    • A61K9/0053Mouth and digestive tract, i.e. intraoral and peroral administration
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D231/00Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings
    • C07D231/02Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D231/10Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D231/14Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D249/00Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having three nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D249/02Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having three nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms not condensed with other rings
    • C07D249/041,2,3-Triazoles; Hydrogenated 1,2,3-triazoles
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D249/00Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having three nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D249/16Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having three nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D249/18Benzotriazoles
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D295/00Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms
    • C07D295/02Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms containing only hydrogen and carbon atoms in addition to the ring hetero elements
    • C07D295/027Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms containing only hydrogen and carbon atoms in addition to the ring hetero elements containing only one hetero ring
    • C07D295/033Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms containing only hydrogen and carbon atoms in addition to the ring hetero elements containing only one hetero ring with the ring nitrogen atoms directly attached to carbocyclic rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07JSTEROIDS
    • C07J13/00Normal steroids containing carbon, hydrogen, halogen or oxygen having a carbon-to-carbon double bond from or to position 17
    • C07J13/007Normal steroids containing carbon, hydrogen, halogen or oxygen having a carbon-to-carbon double bond from or to position 17 with double bond in position 17 (20)
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07JSTEROIDS
    • C07J75/00Processes for the preparation of steroids in general
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07JSTEROIDS
    • C07J9/00Normal steroids containing carbon, hydrogen, halogen or oxygen substituted in position 17 beta by a chain of more than two carbon atoms, e.g. cholane, cholestane, coprostane

Definitions

  • Brain excitability is defined as the level of arousal of an animal, a continuum that ranges from coma to convulsions, and is regulated by various neurotransmitters.
  • neurotransmitters are responsible for regulating the conductance of ions across neuronal membranes.
  • the neuronal membrane At rest, the neuronal membrane possesses a potential (or membrane voltage) of approximately ⁇ 70 mV, the cell interior being negative with respect to the cell exterior.
  • the potential (voltage) is the result of ion (K + , Na + , Cl ⁇ , organic anions) balance across the neuronal semipermeable membrane.
  • Neurotransmitters are stored in presynaptic vesicles and are released under the influence of neuronal action potentials.
  • an excitatory chemical transmitter such as acetylcholine will cause membrane depolarization, e.g., a change of potential from ⁇ 70 mV to ⁇ 50 mV.
  • membrane depolarization e.g., a change of potential from ⁇ 70 mV to ⁇ 50 mV.
  • This effect is mediated by postsynaptic nicotinic receptors which are stimulated by acetylcholine to increase membrane permeability to Na + ions.
  • the reduced membrane potential stimulates neuronal excitability in the form of a postsynaptic action potential.
  • GABA receptor complex In the case of the GABA receptor complex (GRC), the effect on brain excitability is mediated by GABA, a neurotransmitter. GABA has a profound influence on overall brain excitability because up to 40% of the neurons in the brain utilize GABA as a neurotransmitter. GABA regulates the excitability of individual neurons by regulating the conductance of chloride ions across the neuronal membrane. GABA interacts with its recognition site on the GRC to facilitate the flow of chloride ions down an electrochemical gradient of the GRC into the cell. An intracellular increase in the levels of this anion causes hyperpolarization of the transmembrane potential, rendering the neuron less susceptible to excitatory inputs, i.e., reduced neuron excitability. In other words, the higher the chloride ion concentration in the neuron, the lower the brain excitability and level of arousal.
  • GRC is responsible for the mediation of anxiety, seizure activity, and sedation.
  • GABA and drugs that act like GABA or facilitate the effects of GABA e.g., the therapeutically useful barbiturates and benzodiazepines (BZs), such as Valium®
  • BZs benzodiazepines
  • Valium® the therapeutically useful barbiturates and benzodiazepines
  • the GRC contains a distinct site for neuroactive steroids. See, e.g., Lan, N. C. et al., Neurochem. Res . (1991) 16:347-356.
  • Neuroactive steroids can occur endogenously.
  • the most potent endogenous neuroactive steroids are 3 ⁇ -hydroxy-5-reduced pregnan-20-one and 3 ⁇ -21-dihydroxy-5-reduced pregnan-20-one, metabolites of hormonal steroids progesterone and deoxycorticosterone, respectively.
  • the ability of these steroid metabolites to alter brain excitability was recognized in 1986 (Majewska, M. D. et al., Science 232:1004-1007 (1986); Harrison, N. L. et al., J Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 241:346-353 (1987)).
  • the ovarian hormone progesterone and its metabolites have been demonstrated to have profound effects on brain excitability (Backstrom, T. et al., Acta Obstet. Gynecol. Scand. Suppl. 130:19-24 (1985); Pfaff, D. W and McEwen, B. S., Science 219:808-814 (1983); Gyermek et al., J Med Chem. 11: 117 (1968); Lambert, J. et al., Trends Pharmacol. Sci. 8:224-227 (1987)).
  • the levels of progesterone and its metabolites vary with the phases of the menstrual cycle. It has been well documented that the levels of progesterone and its metabolites decrease prior to the onset of menses.
  • PMS premenstrual syndrome
  • the steroid deoxycorticosterone has been found to be effective in treating subjects with epileptic spells correlated with their menstrual cycles (Aird, R. B. and Gordan, G., J. Amer. Med. Soc. 145:715-719 (1951)).
  • PND postnatal depression
  • progesterone levels decrease dramatically leading to the onset of PND.
  • the symptoms of PND range from mild depression to psychosis requiring hospitalization.
  • PND is also associated with severe anxiety and irritability.
  • PND-associated depression is not amenable to treatment by classic antidepressants, and women experiencing PND show an increased incidence of PMS (Dalton, K., Premenstrual Syndrome and Progesterone Therapy, 2nd edition, Chicago Yearbook, Chicago (1984)).
  • New and improved neuroactive steroids are needed that act as modulating agents for brain excitability, as well as agents for the prevention and treatment of CNS-related diseases.
  • the compounds, compositions, and methods described herein are directed toward this end.
  • C21-substituted neuroactive steroids designed, for example, to act as GABA modulators.
  • such compounds are envisioned to be useful as therapeutic agents for the inducement of anesthesia and/or sedation in a subject.
  • such compounds are envisioned to be useful as therapeutic agents for treating a CNS-related disorder (e.g., sleep disorder, a mood disorder such as depression, a schizophrenia spectrum disorder, a convulsive disorder, a disorder of memory and/or cognition, a movement disorder, a personality disorder, autism spectrum disorder, pain, traumatic brain injury, a vascular disease, a substance abuse disorder and/or withdrawal syndrome, or tinnitus) in a subject in need (e.g., a subject with Rett syndrome, Fragile X syndrome, or Angelman syndrome).
  • a CNS-related disorder e.g., sleep disorder, a mood disorder such as depression, a schizophrenia spectrum disorder, a convulsive disorder, a disorder of memory and/or cognition, a movement disorder,
  • A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
  • R 1 is C 1-6 alkyl;
  • R 2a is C 1-6 alkyl;
  • R 2b is hydrogen or C 1-6 alkyl; or
  • R 2a and R 2b are joined to form an oxo ( ⁇ O) group; or
  • R 3 is absent or hydrogen; and represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of is a double bond, the other is a single bond; and when one of the is a double bond, R 3 is absent.
  • R 1 is substituted or unsubstituted C 1-6 alkyl (e.g., haloalkyl). In some embodiments, R 1 is methyl or CF 3 .
  • R 2a is substituted or unsubstituted C 1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 2a is methyl. In some embodiments, R 2b is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R 2b is substituted or unsubstituted C 1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 2a is methyl. In some embodiments, R 2a is methyl and R 2b is hydrogen.
  • R 3 is absent. In some embodiments, R 3 is hydrogen.
  • the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (II) or Formula (III):
  • the compound of Formula (II) is a compound of Formula (II-a) or Formula (II-b):
  • the compound of Formula (III) is a compound of Formula (III-a) or Formula (III-b):
  • A is heterocyclyl or heteroaryl (e.g., nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl or a nitrogen-containing heteroaryl). In some embodiments, A is monocyclic or bicyclic. In some embodiments, A is substituted with at least one R A , wherein R A is C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, C 3-6 carbocylyl, C 1-6 haloalkyl, halogen, cyano, —OR A6 , —C( ⁇ O)OR A6 , —SR B6 , —S( ⁇ O)R B6 , or S( ⁇ O) 2 R B6 , wherein R A6 is hydrogen or C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, C 3-6 carbocylyl, or C 1-6 haloalkyl, and R B6 is C 1-6 alkyl or C 3-6 carbocylyl. In some embodiments, R A6 is C
  • A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
  • R 1 is C 1-6 alkyl;
  • R 2a is C 1-6 alkyl;
  • R 2b is hydrogen or C 1-6 alkyl; or
  • R 2a and R 2b are joined to form an oxo ( ⁇ O) group; or
  • R 3 is absent or hydrogen;
  • R A is C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, C 3-6 carbocylyl, C 1-6 haloalkyl, halogen, cyano, —OR A6 , —C( ⁇ O)OR A6 , —SR B6 , —S( ⁇ O)R B6 , or S( ⁇ O) 2 R B
  • R 1 is substituted or unsubstituted C 1-6 alkyl (e.g., haloalkyl). In some embodiments, R 1 is methyl or CF 3 .
  • R 2a is substituted or unsubstituted C 1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 2a is methyl. In some embodiments, R 2b is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R 2b is substituted or unsubstituted C 1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 2a is methyl. In some embodiments, R 2a is methyl and R 2b is hydrogen.
  • R 3 is absent. In some embodiments, R 3 is hydrogen.
  • the compound of Formula (IV) is a compound of Formula (V) or Formula (VI):
  • the compound of Formula (V) is a compound of Formula (V-a) or Formula (V-b):
  • the compound of Formula (VI) is a compound of Formula (VI-a) or Formula (VI-b):
  • A is selected from:
  • A is:
  • the compound is selected from:
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the Formula (I) and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
  • a method of inducing sedation and/or anesthesia in a subject comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the Formula (I):
  • A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
  • R 1 is C 1-6 alkyl;
  • R 2a is C 1-6 alkyl;
  • R 2b is hydrogen or C 1-6 alkyl; or
  • R 2a and R 2b are joined to form an oxo ( ⁇ O) group; or
  • R 3 is absent or hydrogen; and represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of is a double bond, the other is a single bond; and when one of the is a double bond, R 3 is absent.
  • the subject experiences sedation and/or anesthesia within one hour of administration. In some embodiments, the subject experiences sedation and/or anesthesia instantaneously.
  • the compound is administered by intravenous administration.
  • the compound is administered chronically.
  • the subject is a mammal. In some embodiments, the subject is a human.
  • the compound is administered in combination with another therapeutic agent.
  • a method for treating seizure in a subject comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the Formula (I):
  • A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
  • R 1 is C 1-6 alkyl;
  • R 2a is C 1-6 alkyl;
  • R 2b is hydrogen or C 1-6 alkyl; or
  • R 2a and R 2b are joined to form an oxo ( ⁇ O) group; or
  • R 3 is absent or hydrogen; and represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of is a double bond, the other is a single bond; and when one of the is a double bond, R 3 is absent.
  • a method for treating epilepsy or status or status epilepticus in a subject comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the Formula (I):
  • A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
  • R 1 is C 1-6 alkyl;
  • R 2a is C 1-6 alkyl;
  • R 2b is hydrogen or C 1-6 alkyl; or
  • R 2a and R 2b are joined to form an oxo ( ⁇ O) group; or
  • R 3 is absent or hydrogen; and represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of is a double bond, the other is a single bond; and when one of the is a double bond, R 3 is absent.
  • a method for treating disorders related to GABA function in a subject in need thereof comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or pharmaceutical composition of a compound of Formula (I):
  • A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
  • R 1 is C 1-6 alkyl;
  • R 2a is C 1-6 alkyl;
  • R 2b is hydrogen or C 1-6 alkyl; or
  • R 2a and R 2b are joined to form an oxo ( ⁇ O) group; or
  • R 3 is absent or hydrogen; and represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of is a double bond, the other is a single bond; and when one of the is a double bond, R 3 is absent.
  • a method for treating a CNS-related disorder in a subject in need thereof comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the Formula (I):
  • A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl
  • R 1 is C 1-6 alkyl
  • R 2a is C 1-6 alkyl
  • R 2b is hydrogen or C 1-6 alkyl
  • R 2a and R 2b are joined to form an oxo ( ⁇ O) group
  • R 2a and R 2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring (e.g., a 3-6-membered ring (e.g., carbocycyl or heterocyclyl ring));
  • R 3 is absent or hydrogen
  • R 3 represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of is a double bond, the other is a single bond; and when one of the is a double bond, R 3 is absent.
  • the CNS-related disorder is a sleep disorder, a mood disorder such as depression, a schizophrenia spectrum disorder, a convulsive disorder, a disorder of memory and/or cognition, a movement disorder, a personality disorder, autism spectrum disorder, pain, traumatic brain injury, a vascular disease, a substance abuse disorder and/or withdrawal syndrome, or tinnitus.
  • the subject is a subject with Rett syndrome, Fragile X syndrome, or Angelman syndrome.
  • the compound is administered orally. In some embodiments, the compound is administered intramuscularly.
  • the CNS-related disorder is depression (e.g., post-partum depression).
  • the CNS-related disorder is tremor (e.g., essential tremor).
  • the CNS-related disorder is an eating disorder (e.g., anorexia nervosa, bulimia nervosa, binge-eating disorder, cachexia).
  • kits comprising a solid composition comprising a compound of Formula (I):
  • A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl
  • R 1 is C 1-6 alkyl
  • R 2a is C 1-6 alkyl
  • R 2b is hydrogen or C 1-6 alkyl
  • R 2a and R 2b are joined to form an oxo ( ⁇ O) group
  • R 2a and R 2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring (e.g., a 3-6-membered ring (e.g., carbocycyl or heterocyclyl ring));
  • R 3 is absent or hydrogen
  • the present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising a compound of the present invention and methods of use and treatment, e.g., such as for inducing sedation and/or anesthesia, for treating a CNS-related disorder.
  • Steroids of Formula (I), sub-genera thereof, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof are collectively referred to herein as “compounds of the present invention.”
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the present invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
  • the compound of the present invention is provided in an effective amount in the pharmaceutical composition.
  • the compound of the present invention is provided in a therapeutically effective amount.
  • the compound of the present invention is provided in a prophylactically effective amount.
  • GABA modulators act, in certain embodiments, as GABA modulators, e.g., effecting the GABA A receptor in either a positive or negative manner.
  • modulators of the excitability of the central nervous system (CNS) as mediated by their ability to modulate GABA A receptor, such compounds are expected to have CNS-activity.
  • the CNS-related disorder is selected from the group consisting of a sleep disorder, a mood disorder such as depression, a schizophrenia spectrum disorder, a convulsive disorder, a disorder of memory and/or cognition, a movement disorder, a personality disorder, autism spectrum disorder, pain, traumatic brain injury, a vascular disease, a substance abuse disorder and/or withdrawal syndrome, and tinnitus.
  • the compound is administered orally, subcutaneously, intravenously, or intramuscularly.
  • the compound is administered chronically.
  • the compound is administered continuously, e.g., by continuous intravenous infusion.
  • Compounds described herein can comprise one or more asymmetric centers, and thus can exist in various isomeric forms, e.g., enantiomers and/or diastereomers.
  • the compounds described herein can be in the form of an individual enantiomer, diastereomer or geometric isomer, or can be in the form of a mixture of stereoisomers, including racemic mixtures and mixtures enriched in one or more stereoisomer.
  • Isomers can be isolated from mixtures by methods known to those skilled in the art, including chiral high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) and the formation and crystallization of chiral salts; or preferred isomers can be prepared by asymmetric syntheses.
  • HPLC high pressure liquid chromatography
  • a pure enantiomeric compound is substantially free from other enantiomers or stereoisomers of the compound (i.e., in enantiomeric excess).
  • an “S” form of the compound is substantially free from the “R” form of the compound and is, thus, in enantiomeric excess of the “R” form.
  • enantiomerically pure or “pure enantiomer” denotes that the compound comprises more than 75% by weight, more than 80% by weight, more than 85% by weight, more than 90% by weight, more than 91% by weight, more than 92% by weight, more than 93% by weight, more than 94% by weight, more than 95% by weight, more than 96% by weight, more than 97% by weight, more than 98% by weight, more than 98.5% by weight, more than 99% by weight, more than 99.2% by weight, more than 99.5% by weight, more than 99.6% by weight, more than 99.7% by weight, more than 99.8% by weight or more than 99.9% by weight, of the enantiomer.
  • the weights are based upon total weight of all enantiomers or stereoisomers of the compound.
  • an enantiomerically pure compound can be present with other active or inactive ingredients.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising enantiomerically pure R-compound can comprise, for example, about 90% excipient and about 10% enantiomerically pure R-compound.
  • the enantiomerically pure R-compound in such compositions can, for example, comprise, at least about 95% by weight R-compound and at most about 5% by weight S-compound, by total weight of the compound.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising enantiomerically pure S-compound can comprise, for example, about 90% excipient and about 10% enantiomerically pure S-compound.
  • the enantiomerically pure S-compound in such compositions can, for example, comprise, at least about 95% by weight S-compound and at most about 5% by weight R-compound, by total weight of the compound.
  • the active ingredient can be formulated with little or no excipient or carrier.
  • Compound described herein may also comprise one or more isotopic substitutions.
  • H may be in any isotopic form, including 1 H, 2 H (D or deuterium), and 3 H (T or tritium);
  • C may be in any isotopic form, including 12 C, 13 C, and 14 C;
  • O may be in any isotopic form, including 16 O and 18 O; and the like.
  • analogue means one analogue or more than one analogue.
  • C 1-6 alkyl is intended to encompass, C 1 , C 2 , C 3 , C 4 , C 5 , C 6 , C 1-6 , C 1-5 , C 1-4 , C 1-3 , C 1-2 , C 2-6 , C 2-5 , C 2-4 , C 2-3 , C 3-6 , C 3-5 , C 3-4 , C 4-6 , C 4-5 , and C 5-6 alkyl.
  • Alkyl refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched saturated hydrocarbon group having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms (“C 1-20 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 12 carbon atoms (“C 1-12 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 8 carbon atoms (“C 1-8 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 6 carbon atoms (“C 1-6 alkyl”, also referred to herein as “lower alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 5 carbon atoms (“C 1-5 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 4 carbon atoms (“C 1-4 alkyl”).
  • an alkyl group has 1 to 3 carbon atoms (“C 1-3 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 2 carbon atoms (“C 1-2 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 carbon atom (“C 1 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C 2-6 alkyl”).
  • C 1-6 alkyl groups include methyl (C 1 ), ethyl (C 2 ), n-propyl (C 3 ), isopropyl (C 3 ), n-butyl (C 4 ), tert-butyl (C 4 ), sec-butyl (C 4 ), iso-butyl (C 4 ), n-pentyl (C 5 ), 3-pentanyl (C 5 ), amyl (C 5 ), neopentyl (C 5 ), 3-methyl-2-butanyl (C 5 ), tertiary amyl (C 5 ), and n-hexyl (C 6 ).
  • alkyl groups include n-heptyl (C 7 ), n-octyl (C 8 ) and the like.
  • each instance of an alkyl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted alkyl”) or substituted (a “substituted alkyl”) with one or more substituents; e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent.
  • the alkyl group is unsubstituted C 1-10 alkyl (e.g., —CH 3 ).
  • the alkyl group is substituted C 1-10 alkyl.
  • Alkenyl refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms, one or more carbon-carbon double bonds, and no triple bonds (“C 2-20 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 10 carbon atoms (“C 2-10 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms (“C 2-8 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C 2-6 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms (“C 2-5 alkenyl”).
  • an alkenyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms (“C 2-4 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms (“C 2-3 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 carbon atoms (“C 2 alkenyl”).
  • the one or more carbon-carbon double bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butenyl) or terminal (such as in 1-butenyl). Examples of C 2-4 alkenyl groups include ethenyl (C 2 ), 1-propenyl (C 3 ), 2-propenyl (C 3 ), 1-butenyl (C 4 ), 2-butenyl (C 4 ), butadienyl (C 4 ), and the like.
  • C 2-6 alkenyl groups include the aforementioned C 2-4 alkenyl groups as well as pentenyl (C 5 ), pentadienyl (C 5 ), hexenyl (C 6 ), and the like. Additional examples of alkenyl include heptenyl (C 7 ), octenyl (C 8 ), octatrienyl (C 8 ), and the like.
  • each instance of an alkenyl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted alkenyl”) or substituted (a “substituted alkenyl”) with one or more substituents e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent.
  • the alkenyl group is unsubstituted C 2-10 alkenyl.
  • the alkenyl group is substituted C 2-10 alkenyl.
  • Alkynyl refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms, one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds, and optionally one or more double bonds (“C 2-20 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 10 carbon atoms (“C 2-10 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms (“C 2-8 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C 2-6 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms (“C 2-5 alkynyl”).
  • an alkynyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms (“C 2-4 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms (“C 2-3 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 carbon atoms (“C 2 alkynyl”).
  • the one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butynyl) or terminal (such as in 1-butynyl).
  • Examples of C 2-4 alkynyl groups include, without limitation, ethynyl (C 2 ), 1-propynyl (C 3 ), 2-propynyl (C 3 ), 1-butynyl (C 4 ), 2-butynyl (C 4 ), and the like.
  • Examples of C 2-6 alkenyl groups include the aforementioned C 2-4 alkynyl groups as well as pentynyl (C 5 ), hexynyl (C 6 ), and the like. Additional examples of alkynyl include heptynyl (C 7 ), octynyl (C 8 ), and the like.
  • each instance of an alkynyl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted alkynyl”) or substituted (a “substituted alkynyl”) with one or more substituents; e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent.
  • the alkynyl group is unsubstituted C 2-10 alkynyl.
  • the alkynyl group is substituted C 2-10 alkynyl.
  • Aryl refers to a radical of a monocyclic or polycyclic (e.g., bicyclic or tricyclic) 4n+2 aromatic ring system (e.g., having 6, 10, or 14 ⁇ electrons shared in a cyclic array) having 6-14 ring carbon atoms and zero heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system (“C 6-14 aryl”).
  • an aryl group has six ring carbon atoms (“C 6 aryl”; e.g., phenyl).
  • an aryl group has ten ring carbon atoms (“C 10 aryl”; e.g., naphthyl such as 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl).
  • an aryl group has fourteen ring carbon atoms (“C 14 aryl”; e.g., anthracyl).
  • Aryl also includes ring systems wherein the aryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl groups wherein the radical or point of attachment is on the aryl ring, and in such instances, the number of carbon atoms continue to designate the number of carbon atoms in the aryl ring system.
  • Aryl groups include, but are not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, and tetrahydronaphthyl.
  • each instance of an aryl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted aryl”) or substituted (a “substituted aryl”) with one or more substituents.
  • the aryl group is unsubstituted C 6-14 aryl.
  • the aryl group is substituted C 6-14 aryl.
  • R 56 and R 57 may be hydrogen and at least one of R 56 and R 57 is each independently selected from C 1 -C 8 alkyl, C 1 -C 8 haloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, alkanoyl, C 1 -C 8 alkoxy, heteroaryloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, NR 58 COR 59 , NR 58 SOR 59 NR 58 SO 2 R 59 , COOalkyl, COOaryl, CONR 58 R 59 , CONR 58 OR 59 , NR 58 R 59 , SO 2 NR 58 R 59 , S-alkyl, SOalkyl, SO 2 alkyl, Saryl, SOaryl, SO 2 aryl; or R 56 and R 57 may be joined to form a cyclic ring (saturated or unsaturated) from 5 to 8 atoms, optionally containing one or more heteroatoms
  • R 60 and R 61 are independently hydrogen, C 1 -C 8 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl, C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C 6 -C 10 aryl, substituted C 6 -C 10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  • aryl groups having a fused heterocyclyl group include the following:
  • each W is selected from C(R 66 ) 2 , NR 66 , O, and S; and each Y is selected from carbonyl, NR 66 , O and S; and R 66 is independently hydrogen, C 1 -C 8 alkyl, C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C 6 -C 10 aryl, and 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  • Halo or “halogen,” independently or as part of another substituent, mean, unless otherwise stated, a fluorine (F), chlorine (Cl), bromine (Br), or iodine (I) atom.
  • halide by itself or as part of another substituent, refers to a fluoride, chloride, bromide, or iodide atom. In certain embodiments, the halo group is either fluorine or chlorine.
  • Haloalkyl and haloalkoxy can include alkyl and alkoxy structures that are substituted with one or more halo groups or with combinations thereof.
  • fluoroalkyl and fluoroalkoxy include haloalkyl and haloalkoxy groups, respectively, in which the halo is fluorine.
  • Heteroaryl refers to a radical of a 5-10 membered monocyclic or bicyclic 4n+2 aromatic ring system (e.g., having 6 or 10 ⁇ electrons shared in a cyclic array) having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur (“5-10 membered heteroaryl”).
  • heteroaryl groups that contain one or more nitrogen atoms, the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits.
  • Heteroaryl bicyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings.
  • Heteroaryl includes ring systems wherein the heteroaryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl groups wherein the point of attachment is on the heteroaryl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members continue to designate the number of ring members in the heteroaryl ring system. “Heteroaryl” also includes ring systems wherein the heteroaryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the aryl or heteroaryl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members designates the number of ring members in the fused (aryl/heteroaryl) ring system.
  • Bicyclic heteroaryl groups wherein one ring does not contain a heteroatom e.g., indolyl, quinolinyl, carbazolyl, and the like
  • the point of attachment can be on either ring, i.e., either the ring bearing a heteroatom (e.g., 2-indolyl) or the ring that does not contain a heteroatom (e.g., 5-indolyl).
  • a heteroaryl group is a 5-10 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-10 membered heteroaryl”).
  • a heteroaryl group is a 5-8 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-8 membered heteroaryl”).
  • a heteroaryl group is a 5-6 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-6 membered heteroaryl”).
  • the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1 ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • each instance of a heteroaryl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted heteroaryl”) or substituted (a “substituted heteroaryl”) with one or more substituents.
  • the heteroaryl group is unsubstituted 5-14 membered heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, the heteroaryl group is substituted 5-14 membered heteroaryl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, pyrrolyl, furanyl and thiophenyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, and isothiazolyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing three heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolyl, oxadiazolyl, and thiadiazolyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing four heteroatoms include, without limitation, tetrazolyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, pyridinyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, and pyrazinyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing three or four heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinyl and tetrazinyl, respectively.
  • Exemplary 7-membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azepinyl, oxepinyl, and thiepinyl.
  • Exemplary 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, indolyl, isoindolyl, indazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzofuranyl, benzoisofuranyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, benzthiadiazolyl, indolizinyl, and purinyl.
  • Exemplary 6,6-bicyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, phthalazinyl, and quinazolinyl.
  • each Y is selected from carbonyl, N, NR 65 , O, and S; and R 65 is independently hydrogen, C 1 -C 8 alkyl, C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C 6 -C 10 aryl, and 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  • Carbocyclyl or “carbocyclic” refers to a radical of a non-aromatic cyclic hydrocarbon group having from 3 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C 3-10 carbocyclyl”) and zero heteroatoms in the non-aromatic ring system.
  • a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 8 ring carbon atoms (“C 3-8 carbocyclyl”).
  • a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C 3-6 carbocyclyl”).
  • a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C 3-6 carbocyclyl”).
  • a carbocyclyl group has 5 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C 5-10 carbocyclyl”).
  • Exemplary C 3-6 carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, cyclopropyl (C 3 ), cyclopropenyl (C 3 ), cyclobutyl (C 4 ), cyclobutenyl (C 4 ), cyclopentyl (C 5 ), cyclopentenyl (C 5 ), cyclohexyl (C 6 ), cyclohexenyl (C 6 ), cyclohexadienyl (C 6 ), and the like.
  • Exemplary C 3-8 carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, the aforementioned C 3-6 carbocyclyl groups as well as cycloheptyl (C 7 ), cycloheptenyl (C 7 ), cycloheptadienyl (C 7 ), cycloheptatrienyl (C 7 ), cyclooctyl (C 8 ), cyclooctenyl (C 8 ), bicyclo[2.2.1]heptanyl (C 7 ), bicyclo[2.2.2]octanyl (C 8 ), and the like.
  • Exemplary C 3-10 carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, the aforementioned C 3-8 carbocyclyl groups as well as cyclononyl (C 9 ), cyclononenyl (C 9 ), cyclodecyl (C 10 ), cyclodecenyl (C 10 ), octahydro-1H-indenyl (C 9 ), decahydronaphthalenyl (C 10 ), spiro[4.5]decanyl (C 10 ), and the like.
  • the carbocyclyl group is either monocyclic (“monocyclic carbocyclyl”) or contain a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system (“bicyclic carbocyclyl”) and can be saturated or can be partially unsaturated.
  • “Carbocyclyl” also includes ring systems wherein the carbocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl or heteroaryl groups wherein the point of attachment is on the carbocyclyl ring, and in such instances, the number of carbons continue to designate the number of carbons in the carbocyclic ring system.
  • each instance of a carbocyclyl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted carbocyclyl”) or substituted (a “substituted carbocyclyl”) with one or more substituents.
  • the carbocyclyl group is unsubstituted C 3-10 carbocyclyl.
  • the carbocyclyl group is a substituted C 3-10 carbocyclyl.
  • “carbocyclyl” is a monocyclic, saturated carbocyclyl group having from 3 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C 3-10 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 8 ring carbon atoms (“C 3-8 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C 3-6 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 5 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C 5-6 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 5 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C 5-10 cycloalkyl”).
  • C 5-6 cycloalkyl groups include cyclopentyl (C 5 ) and cyclohexyl (C 5 ).
  • Examples of C 3-6 cycloalkyl groups include the aforementioned C 5-6 cycloalkyl groups as well as cyclopropyl (C 3 ) and cyclobutyl (C 4 ).
  • Examples of C 3-8 cycloalkyl groups include the aforementioned C 3-6 cycloalkyl groups as well as cycloheptyl (C 7 ) and cyclooctyl (C 8 ).
  • each instance of a cycloalkyl group is independently unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted cycloalkyl”) or substituted (a “substituted cycloalkyl”) with one or more substituents.
  • the cycloalkyl group is unsubstituted C 3-10 cycloalkyl.
  • the cycloalkyl group is substituted C 3-10 cycloalkyl.
  • Heterocyclyl or “heterocyclic” refers to a radical of a 3- to 10-membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1 to 4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, boron, phosphorus, and silicon (“3-10 membered heterocyclyl”).
  • the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits.
  • a heterocyclyl group can either be monocyclic (“monocyclic heterocyclyl”) or a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system (“bicyclic heterocyclyl”), and can be saturated or can be partially unsaturated.
  • Heterocyclyl bicyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings.
  • Heterocyclyl also includes ring systems wherein the heterocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl ring, or ring systems wherein the heterocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl or heteroaryl groups, wherein the point of attachment is on the heterocyclyl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members continue to designate the number of ring members in the heterocyclyl ring system.
  • each instance of heterocyclyl is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted heterocyclyl”) or substituted (a “substituted heterocyclyl”) with one or more substituents.
  • the heterocyclyl group is unsubstituted 3-10 membered heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, the heterocyclyl group is substituted 3-10 membered heterocyclyl.
  • a heterocyclyl group is a 5-10 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, boron, phosphorus, and silicon (“5-10 membered heterocyclyl”).
  • a heterocyclyl group is a 5-8 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-8 membered heterocyclyl”).
  • a heterocyclyl group is a 5-6 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-6 membered heterocyclyl”).
  • the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has one ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • Exemplary 3-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azirdinyl, oxiranyl, thiorenyl.
  • Exemplary 4-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azetidinyl, oxetanyl and thietanyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, dihydrothiophenyl, pyrrolidinyl, dihydropyrrolyl and pyrrolyl-2,5-dione.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, dioxolanyl, oxasulfuranyl, disulfuranyl, and oxazolidin-2-one.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing three heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolinyl, oxadiazolinyl, and thiadiazolinyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyridinyl, and thianyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, dithianyl, dioxanyl. Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinanyl. Exemplary 7-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azepanyl, oxepanyl and thiepanyl. Exemplary 8-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azocanyl, oxecanyl and thiocanyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups fused to a C 6 aryl ring include, without limitation, indolinyl, isoindolinyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, dihydrobenzothienyl, benzoxazolinonyl, and the like.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups fused to an aryl ring include, without limitation, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, and the like.
  • heterocyclyl groups are shown in the following illustrative examples:
  • each W is selected from CR 67 , C(R 67 ) 2 , NR 67 , O, and S; and each Y is selected from NR 67 , O, and S; and R 67 is independently hydrogen, C 1 -C 8 alkyl, C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C 6 -C 10 aryl, and 5-10-membered heteroaryl.
  • heterocyclyl rings may be optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl (e.g., amido), aminocarbonylamino, aminosulfonyl, sulfonylamino, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, halogen, hydroxy, keto, nitro, thiol, —S-alkyl, —S-aryl, —S(O)-alkyl, —S(O)-aryl, —S(O) 2 -alkyl, and —S(O) 2 -aryl.
  • Substituting groups include carbonyl or thiocarbonyl which provide, for example, lactam and urea derivatives.
  • “Acyl” refers to a radical —C(O)R 20 , where R 20 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, as defined herein.
  • “Alkanoyl” is an acyl group wherein R 20 is a group other than hydrogen.
  • acyl groups include, but are not limited to, formyl (—CHO), acetyl (—C( ⁇ O)CH 3 ), cyclohexylcarbonyl, cyclohexylmethylcarbonyl, benzoyl (—C( ⁇ O)Ph), benzylcarbonyl (—C( ⁇ O)CH 2 Ph), —C(O)—C 1 -C 8 alkyl, —C(O)—(CH 2 ) t (C 6 -C 10 aryl), —C(O)—(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), —C(O)—(CH 2 ) t (C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl), and —C(O)—(CH 2 ) t (4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4.
  • R 21 is C 1 -C 8 alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; or C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C 6 -C 10 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
  • “Acylamino” refers to a radical —NR 22 C(O)R 23 , where each instance of R 22 and R 23 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, as defined herein, or R 22 is an amino protecting group.
  • acylamino groups include, but are not limited to, formylamino, acetylamino, cyclohexylcarbonylamino, cyclohexylmethyl-carbonylamino, benzoylamino and benzylcarbonylamino.
  • acylamino groups are —NR 24 C(O)—C 1 -C 8 alkyl, —NR 24 C(O)—(CH 2 ) t (C 6 -C 10 aryl), —NR 24 C(O)—(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), —NR 24 C(O)—(CH 2 ) t (C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl), and —NR 24 C(O)—(CH 2 ) t (4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4, and each R 24 independently represents hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl.
  • R 25 is H, C 1 -C 8 alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C 6 -C 10 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy; and R 26 is H, C 1 -C 8 alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, 4-10-membered heterocyclyl, C 6 -C 10 aryl, arylalkyl
  • “Acyloxy” refers to a radical —OC(O)R 27 , where R 27 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, as defined herein.
  • Representative examples include, but are not limited to, formyl, acetyl, cyclohexylcarbonyl, cyclohexylmethylcarbonyl, benzoyl, and benzylcarbonyl.
  • R 28 is C 1 -C 8 alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, 4-10-membered heterocyclyl, C 6 -C 10 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10-membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
  • Alkoxy refers to the group —OR 29 where R 29 is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.
  • Particular alkoxy groups are methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, and 1,2-dimethylbutoxy.
  • Particular alkoxy groups are lower alkoxy, i.e., with between 1 and 6 carbon atoms. Further particular alkoxy groups have between 1 and 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 29 is a group that has 1 or more substituents, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, in particular 1 substituent, selected from the group consisting of amino, substituted amino, C 6 -C 10 aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, cyano, C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, halogen, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, hydroxy, nitro, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thiol, alkyl-S(O)—, aryl-S(O)—, alkyl-S(O) 2 — and aryl-S(O) 2 —.
  • substituents for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, in particular 1 substituent, selected from the group consisting of amino, substituted amino, C 6 -C 10 aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, cyano, C 3 -C
  • substituted alkoxy groups include, but are not limited to, —O—(CH 2 ) t (C 6 -C 10 aryl), —O—(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), —O—(CH 2 ) t (C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl), and —O—(CH 2 ) t (4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4 and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
  • Particular exemplary ‘substituted alkoxy’ groups are —OCF 3 , —OCH 2 CF 3 , —OCH 2 Ph, —OCH 2 -cyclopropyl, —OCH 2 CH 2 OH, and —OCH 2 CH 2 NMe 2 .
  • Amino refers to the radical —NH 2 .
  • Substituted amino refers to an amino group of the formula —N(R 38 ) 2 wherein R 38 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or an amino protecting group, wherein at least one of R 38 is not a hydrogen.
  • each R 38 is independently selected from hydrogen, C 1 -C 8 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 alkenyl, C 3 -C 8 alkynyl, C 6 -C 10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, or C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl; or C 1 -C 8 alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C 3 -C 8 alkenyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C 3 -C 8 alkynyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy, or —(CH 2 ) t (C 6 -C 10 aryl), —(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), —(CH 2 ) t (C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl), or —(CH 2 ) t (4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer between 0 and 8, each of which is substituted by
  • substituted amino groups include, but are not limited to, —NR 39 —C 1 -C 8 alkyl, —NR 39 —(CH 2 ) t (C 6 -C 10 aryl), —NR 39 —(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), —NR 39 —(CH 2 ) t (C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl), and —NR 39 —(CH 2 ) t (4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4, for instance 1 or 2, each R 39 independently represents hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl; and any alkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy; and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C 1 -C
  • substituted amino includes the groups alkylamino, substituted alkylamino, alkylarylamino, substituted alkylarylamino, arylamino, substituted arylamino, dialkylamino, and substituted dialkylamino as defined below.
  • Substituted amino encompasses both monosubstituted amino and disubstituted amino groups.
  • “Azido” refers to the radical —N 3 .
  • Carbamoyl or “amido” refers to the radical —C(O)NH 2 .
  • Substituted carbamoyl or “substituted amido” refers to the radical —C(O)N(R 62 ) 2 wherein each R 62 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or an amino protecting group, wherein at least one of R 62 is not a hydrogen.
  • R 62 is selected from H, C 1 -C 8 alkyl, C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C 6 -C 10 aryl, and 5-10 membered heteroaryl; or C 1 -C 8 alkyl substituted with halo or hydroxy; or C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C 6 -C 10 aryl, or 5-10 membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted by unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy; provided that at least one R 62 is other than H.
  • Carboxy refers to the radical —C(O)OH.
  • “Cyano” refers to the radical —CN.
  • Haldroxy refers to the radical —OH.
  • Niro refers to the radical —NO 2 .
  • Ethenyl refers to substituted or unsubstituted —(C ⁇ C)—.
  • Ethylene refers to substituted or unsubstituted —(C—C)—.
  • Ethynyl refers to —(C ⁇ C)—.
  • Nonrogen-containing heterocyclyl means a 4- to 7-membered non-aromatic cyclic group containing at least one nitrogen atom, for example, but without limitation, morpholine, piperidine (e.g. 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl and 4-piperidinyl), pyrrolidine (e.g. 2-pyrrolidinyl and 3-pyrrolidinyl), azetidine, pyrrolidone, imidazoline, imidazolidinone, 2-pyrazoline, pyrazolidine, piperazine, and N-alkyl piperazines such as N-methyl piperazine. Particular examples include azetidine, piperidone and piperazone.
  • Alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl groups, as defined herein, are optionally substituted (e.g., “substituted” or “unsubstituted” alkyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” alkenyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” alkynyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” carbocyclyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” heterocyclyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” aryl or “substituted” or “unsubstituted” heteroaryl group).
  • substituted means that at least one hydrogen present on a group (e.g., a carbon or nitrogen atom) is replaced with a permissible substituent, e.g., a substituent which upon substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., a compound which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, or other reaction.
  • a “substituted” group has a substituent at one or more substitutable positions of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure is substituted, the substituent is either the same or different at each position.
  • substituted is contemplated to include substitution with all permissible substituents of organic compounds, any of the substituents described herein that results in the formation of a stable compound.
  • the present invention contemplates any and all such combinations in order to arrive at a stable compound.
  • heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any suitable substituent as described herein which satisfy the valencies of the heteroatoms and results in the formation of a stable moiety.
  • Exemplary carbon atom substituents include, but are not limited to, halogen, —CN, —NO 2 , —N 3 , —SO 2 H, —SO 3 H, —OH, —OR aa , —ON(R bb ) 2 , —N(R bb ) 2 , —N(R bb ) 3 + X ⁇ , —N(OR cc )R bb , —SH, —SR aa , —SSR cc , —C( ⁇ O)R aa , —CO 2 H, —CHO, —C(OR cc ) 2 , —CO 2 R aa , —OC( ⁇ O)R aa , —OCO 2 R aa , —C( ⁇ O)N(R bb ) 2 , —OC( ⁇ O)N(R bb ) 2 , —NR bb C
  • each instance of R aa is, independently, selected from C 1-10 alkyl, C 1-10 perhaloalkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl, C 2-10 alkynyl, C 3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two R aa groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R dd groups;
  • each instance of R bb is, independently, selected from hydrogen, —OH, —OR aa , —N(R cc ) 2 , —CN, —C( ⁇ O)R aa , —C( ⁇ O)N(R cc ) 2 , —CO 2 R aa , —SO 2 R aa , —C( ⁇ NR cc )OR aa , —C( ⁇ NR cc )N(R cc ) 2 , —SO 2 N(R cc ) 2 , —SO 2 R cc , —SO 2 OR cc , —SOR aa , —C( ⁇ S)N(R cc ) 2 , —C( ⁇ O)SR cc , —C( ⁇ S)SR cc , —P( ⁇ O) 2 R aa , —P( ⁇ O)(R aa ) 2 ,
  • each instance of R cc is, independently, selected from hydrogen, C 1-10 alkyl, C 1-10 perhaloalkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl, C 2-10 alkynyl, C 3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two R cc groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R dd groups;
  • each instance of R dd is, independently, selected from halogen, —CN, —NO 2 , —N 3 , —SO 2 H, —SO 3 H, —OH, —OR ee , —ON(R ff ) 2 , —N(R ff ) 2 , —N(R ff ) 3 + X ⁇ , —N(OR ee )R ff , —SH, —SR ee , —SSR ee , —C( ⁇ O)R ee , —CO 2 H, —CO 2 R ee , —OC( ⁇ O)R ee , —OCO 2 R ee , —C( ⁇ O)N(R ff ) 2 , —OC( ⁇ O)N(R ff ) 2 , —NR ff C( ⁇ O)R ee , —NR ff CO 2 R
  • each instance of R ee is, independently, selected from C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 perhaloalkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, C 3-10 carbocyclyl, C 6-10 aryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, and 3-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R gg groups;
  • each instance of R ff is, independently, selected from hydrogen, C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 perhaloalkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, C 3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-10 aryl and 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or two R ff groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R gg groups; and
  • each instance of R gg is, independently, halogen, —CN, —NO 2 , —N 3 , —SO 2 H, —SO 3 H, —OH, —OC 1-6 alkyl, —ON(C 1-6 alkyl) 2 , —N(C 1-6 alkyl) 2 , —N(C 1-6 alkyl) 3 + X ⁇ , —NH(C 1-6 alkyl) 2 + X ⁇ , —NH 2 (C 1-6 alkyl) + X ⁇ , —NH 3 + X ⁇ , —N(OC 1-6 alkyl)(C 1-6 alkyl), —N(OH)(C 1-6 alkyl), —NH(OH), —SH, —SC 1-6 alkyl, —SS(C 1-6 alkyl), —C( ⁇ O)(C 1-6 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1-6 alkyl), —OC( ⁇ O)
  • a “counterion” or “anionic counterion” is a negatively charged group associated with a cationic quaternary amino group in order to maintain electronic neutrality.
  • exemplary counterions include halide ions (e.g., F ⁇ , Cl ⁇ , Br ⁇ , I ⁇ ), NO 3 ⁇ , ClO 4 ⁇ , OH ⁇ , H 2 PO 4 ⁇ , HSO 4 ⁇ , sulfonate ions (e.g., methansulfonate, trifluoromethanesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, 10-camphor sulfonate, naphthalene-2-sulfonate, naphthalene-1-sulfonic acid-5-sulfonate, ethan-1-sulfonic acid-2-sulfonate, and the like), and carboxylate ions (e.g., acetate,
  • Nitrogen atoms can be substituted or unsubstituted as valency permits, and include primary, secondary, tertiary, and quarternary nitrogen atoms.
  • Exemplary nitrogen atom substitutents include, but are not limited to, hydrogen, —OH, —OR aa , —N(R cc ) 2 , —CN, —C( ⁇ O)R aa , —C( ⁇ O)N(R cc ) 2 , —CO 2 R aa , —SO 2 R aa , —C( ⁇ NR bb )R aa , —C( ⁇ NR cc )OR aa , —C( ⁇ NR cc )N(R cc ) 2 , —SO 2 N(R cc ) 2 , —SO 2 R cc , —SO 2 OR cc , —SOR aa , —C( ⁇ S)N(R
  • the substituent present on a nitrogen atom is an amino protecting group (also referred to herein as a nitrogen protecting group).
  • Amino protecting groups include, but are not limited to, —OH, —OR aa , —N(R cc ) 2 , —C( ⁇ O)R aa , —C( ⁇ O)OR aa , —C( ⁇ O)N(R cc ) 2 , —S( ⁇ O) 2 R aa , —C( ⁇ NR cc )R aa , —C( ⁇ NR cc )OR aa , —C( ⁇ NR cc )N(R cc ) 2 , —SO 2 N(R cc ) 2 , —SO 2 R cc , —SO 2 OR cc , —SOR aa , —C( ⁇ S)N(R cc ) 2 , —C( ⁇ O)
  • Amino protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis , T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, 3 rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference.
  • Exemplary amino protecting groups include, but are not limited to amide groups (e.g., —C( ⁇ O)R aa ), which include, but are not limited to, formamide and acetamide; carbamate groups (e.g., —C( ⁇ O)OR aa ), which include, but are not limited to, 9-fluorenylmethyl carbamate (Fmoc), t-butyl carbamate (BOC), and benzyl carbamate (Cbz); sulfonamide groups (e.g., —S( ⁇ O) 2 R aa ), which include, but are not limited to, p-toluenesulfonamide (Ts), methanesulfonamide (Ms), and N-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methylamine (SEM).
  • amide groups e.g., —C( ⁇ O)R aa
  • carbamate groups e.g., —C( ⁇ O)
  • the substituent present on an oxygen atom is an oxygen protecting group (also referred to as a hydroxyl protecting group).
  • Oxygen protecting groups include, but are not limited to, —R aa , —N(R bb ) 2 , —C( ⁇ O)SR aa , —C( ⁇ O)R aa , —CO 2 R aa , —C( ⁇ O)N(R bb ) 2 , —C( ⁇ NR bb )R aa , —C( ⁇ NR bb )OR aa , —C( ⁇ NR bb )N(R bb ) 2 , —S( ⁇ O)R aa , —SO 2 R aa , —Si(R aa ) 3 , —P(R cc ) 2 , —P(R cc ) 3 , —P( ⁇ O) 2 R aa ,
  • Oxygen protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis , T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, 3 rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference.
  • oxygen protecting groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, methoxylmethyl (MOM), 2-methoxyethoxymethyl (MEM), benzyl (Bn), triisopropylsilyl (TIPS), t-butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS), t-butylmethoxyphenylsilyl (TBMPS), methanesulfonate (mesylate), and tosylate (Ts).
  • the substituent present on an sulfur atom is an sulfur protecting group (also referred to as a thiol protecting group).
  • Sulfur protecting groups include, but are not limited to, —R aa , —N(R bb ) 2 , —C( ⁇ O)SR aa , —C( ⁇ O)R aa , —CO 2 R aa , —C( ⁇ O)N(R bb ) 2 , —C( ⁇ NR bb )R aa , —C( ⁇ NR bb )OR aa , —C( ⁇ NR bb )N(R bb ) 2 , —S( ⁇ O)R aa , —SO 2 R aa , —Si(R aa ) 3 , —P(R cc ) 2 , —P(R cc ) 3 , —P( ⁇ O) 2 R aa ,
  • Sulfur protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis , T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, 3 rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference.
  • modulation refers to the inhibition or potentiation of GABA receptor function.
  • a “modulator” e.g., a modulator compound
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable” means approved or approvable by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or the corresponding agency in countries other than the United States, or that is listed in the U.S. Pharmacopoeia or other generally recognized pharmacopoeia for use in animals, and more particularly, in humans.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to a salt of a compound of the invention that is pharmaceutically acceptable and that possesses the desired pharmacological activity of the parent compound.
  • such salts are non-toxic may be inorganic or organic acid addition salts and base addition salts.
  • such salts include: (1) acid addition salts, formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like; or formed with organic acids such as acetic acid, propionic acid, hexanoic acid, cyclopentanepropionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, lactic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, malic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, 3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl) benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, 1,2-ethane-disulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, 4-chlorobenzenesulfonic acid, 2-naphthalenesulfonic acid, 4-toluenesulfonic acid
  • Salts further include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like; and when the compound contains a basic functionality, salts of non-toxic organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate and the like.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable cation refers to an acceptable cationic counter-ion of an acidic functional group. Such cations are exemplified by sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium cations, and the like. See, e.g., Berge, et al., J. Pharm. Sci . (1977) 66(1): 1-79.
  • Solvate refers to forms of the compound that are associated with a solvent or water (also referred to as “hydrate”), usually by a solvolysis reaction. This physical association includes hydrogen bonding.
  • solvents include water, ethanol, acetic acid, and the like.
  • the compounds of the invention may be prepared e.g. in crystalline form and may be solvated or hydrated.
  • Suitable solvates include pharmaceutically acceptable solvates, such as hydrates, and further include both stoichiometric solvates and non-stoichiometric solvates. In certain instances the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid.
  • “Solvate” encompasses both solution-phase and isolable solvates.
  • Representative solvates include hydrates, ethanolates and methanolates.
  • the term “isotopic variant” refers to a compound that contains unnatural proportions of isotopes at one or more of the atoms that constitute such compound.
  • an “isotopic variant” of a compound can contain one or more non-radioactive isotopes, such as for example, deuterium ( 2 H or D), carbon-13 ( 13 C), nitrogen-15 ( 15 N), or the like.
  • non-radioactive isotopes such as for example, deuterium ( 2 H or D), carbon-13 ( 13 C), nitrogen-15 ( 15 N), or the like.
  • the invention may include the preparation of isotopic variants with radioisotopes, in the instance for example, where the resulting compounds may be used for drug and/or substrate tissue distribution studies.
  • the radioactive isotopes tritium, i.e., 3 H, and carbon-14, i.e., 14 C, are particularly useful for this purpose in view of their ease of incorporation and ready means of detection.
  • compounds may be prepared that are substituted with positron emitting isotopes, such as 11 C, 18 F, 15 O, and 13 N, and would be useful in Positron Emission Topography (PET) studies for examining substrate receptor occupancy. All isotopic variants of the compounds provided herein, radioactive or not, are intended to be encompassed within the scope of the invention.
  • Stepoisomers It is also to be understood that compounds that have the same molecular formula but differ in the nature or sequence of bonding of their atoms or the arrangement of their atoms in space are termed “isomers.” Isomers that differ in the arrangement of their atoms in space are termed “stereoisomers.” Stereoisomers that are not mirror images of one another are termed “diastereomers” and those that are non-superimposable mirror images of each other are termed “enantiomers.” When a compound has an asymmetric center, for example, it is bonded to four different groups, a pair of enantiomers is possible.
  • An enantiomer can be characterized by the absolute configuration of its asymmetric center and is described by the R- and S-sequencing rules of Cahn and Prelog, or by the manner in which the molecule rotates the plane of polarized light and designated as dextrorotatory or levorotatory (i.e., as (+) or ( ⁇ )-isomers respectively).
  • a chiral compound can exist as either individual enantiomer or as a mixture thereof. A mixture containing equal proportions of the enantiomers is called a “racemic mixture”.
  • Tautomers refer to compounds that are interchangeable forms of a particular compound structure, and that vary in the displacement of hydrogen atoms and electrons. Thus, two structures may be in equilibrium through the movement of ⁇ electrons and an atom (usually H). For example, enols and ketones are tautomers because they are rapidly interconverted by treatment with either acid or base. Another example of tautomerism is the aci- and nitro-forms of phenylnitromethane, that are likewise formed by treatment with acid or base. Tautomeric forms may be relevant to the attainment of the optimal chemical reactivity and biological activity of a compound of interest.
  • a “subject” to which administration is contemplated includes, but is not limited to, humans (i.e., a male or female of any age group, e.g., a pediatric subject (e.g, infant, child, adolescent) or adult subject (e.g., young adult, middle-aged adult or senior adult)) and/or a non-human animal, e.g., a mammal such as primates (e.g., cynomolgus monkeys, rhesus monkeys), cattle, pigs, horses, sheep, goats, rodents, cats, and/or dogs.
  • the subject is a human.
  • the subject is a non-human animal.
  • the terms “human,” “patient,” and “subject” are used interchangeably herein.
  • the terms “treat,” “treating” and “treatment” contemplate an action that occurs while a subject is suffering from the specified disease, disorder or condition, which reduces the severity of the disease, disorder or condition, or retards or slows the progression of the disease, disorder or condition (“therapeutic treatment”), and also contemplates an action that occurs before a subject begins to suffer from the specified disease, disorder or condition (“prophylactic treatment”).
  • the “effective amount” of a compound refers to an amount sufficient to elicit the desired biological response, e.g., to treat a CNS-related disorder, is sufficient to induce anesthesia or sedation.
  • the effective amount of a compound of the invention may vary depending on such factors as the desired biological endpoint, the pharmacokinetics of the compound, the disease being treated, the mode of administration, and the age, weight, health, and condition of the subject.
  • An effective amount encompasses therapeutic and prophylactic treatment.
  • a “therapeutically effective amount” of a compound is an amount sufficient to provide a therapeutic benefit in the treatment of a disease, disorder or condition, or to delay or minimize one or more symptoms associated with the disease, disorder or condition.
  • a therapeutically effective amount of a compound means an amount of therapeutic agent, alone or in combination with other therapies, which provides a therapeutic benefit in the treatment of the disease, disorder or condition.
  • the term “therapeutically effective amount” can encompass an amount that improves overall therapy, reduces or avoids symptoms or causes of disease or condition, or enhances the therapeutic efficacy of another therapeutic agent.
  • a “prophylactically effective amount” of a compound is an amount sufficient to prevent a disease, disorder or condition, or one or more symptoms associated with the disease, disorder or condition, or prevent its recurrence.
  • a prophylactically effective amount of a compound means an amount of a therapeutic agent, alone or in combination with other agents, which provides a prophylactic benefit in the prevention of the disease, disorder or condition.
  • the term “prophylactically effective amount” can encompass an amount that improves overall prophylaxis or enhances the prophylactic efficacy of another prophylactic agent.
  • the present invention provides C21-substituted neuroactive steroids designed, for example, to act as GABA modulators.
  • such compounds are envisioned to be useful as therapeutic agents for the inducement of anesthesia and/or sedation in a subject.
  • such compounds are envisioned to be useful as therapeutic agents for treating a CNS-related disorder.
  • A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
  • R 1 is C 1-6 alkyl;
  • R 2a is C 1-6 alkyl;
  • R 2b is hydrogen or C 1-6 alkyl; or
  • R 2a and R 2b are joined to form an oxo ( ⁇ O) group; or
  • R 3 is absent or hydrogen; and represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of is a double bond, the other is a single bond; and when one of the is a double bond, R 3 is absent.
  • R 1 is substituted or unsubstituted C 1-6 alkyl (e.g., haloalkyl). In some embodiments, R 1 is methyl or CF 3 .
  • R 2a is substituted or unsubstituted C 1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 2a is methyl. In some embodiments, R 2b is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R 2b is substituted or unsubstituted C 1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 2a is methyl. In some embodiments, R 2a is methyl and R 2b is hydrogen.
  • R 3 is absent. In some embodiments, R 3 is hydrogen.
  • the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (II) or Formula (III):
  • the compound of Formula (II) is a compound of Formula (II-a) or Formula (II-b):
  • the compound of Formula (III) is a compound of Formula (III-a) or Formula (III-b):
  • A is heterocyclyl or heteroaryl (e.g., nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl or a nitrogen-containing heteroaryl). In some embodiments, A is monocyclic or bicyclic. In some embodiments, A is substituted with at least one R A , wherein R A is C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, C 3-6 carbocylyl, C 1-6 haloalkyl, halogen, cyano, —OR A6 , —C( ⁇ O)OR A6 , —SR B6 , —S( ⁇ O)R B6 , or S( ⁇ O) 2 R B6 , wherein R A6 is hydrogen or C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, C 3-6 carbocylyl, or C 1-6 haloalkyl, and R B6 is C 1-6 alkyl or C 3-6 carbocylyl. In some embodiments, R A6 is C
  • A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
  • R 1 is C 1-6 alkyl;
  • R 2a is C 1-6 alkyl;
  • R 2b is hydrogen or C 1-6 alkyl; or
  • R 2a and R 2b are joined to form an oxo ( ⁇ O) group; or
  • R 3 is absent or hydrogen;
  • R A is C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, C 3-6 carbocylyl, C 1-6 haloalkyl, halogen, cyano, —OR A6 , —C( ⁇ O)OR A6 , —SR B6 , —S( ⁇ O)R B6 , or S( ⁇ O) 2 R B
  • R 1 is substituted or unsubstituted C 1-6 alkyl (e.g., haloalkyl). In some embodiments, R 1 is methyl or CF 3 .
  • R 2a is substituted or unsubstituted C 1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 2a is methyl. In some embodiments, R 2b is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R 2b is substituted or unsubstituted C 1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 2a is methyl. In some embodiments, R 2a is methyl and R 2b is hydrogen.
  • R 3 is absent. In some embodiments, R 3 is hydrogen.
  • the compound of Formula (IV) is a compound of Formula (V) or Formula (VI):
  • the compound of Formula (V) is a compound of Formula (V-a) or Formula (V-b):
  • the compound of Formula (VI) is a compound of Formula (VI-a) or Formula (VI-b):
  • A is selected from:
  • A is:
  • the compound is selected from:
  • a method for treating disorders related to GABA function in a subject in need thereof comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or pharmaceutical composition of one of a compound as described herein, e.g., a compound of the Formula (I), Formula (II) (e.g., (II-a), (II-b)), Formula (III) (e.g., (III-a), (III-b)), Formula (IV), Formula (V) (e.g., (V-a), (V-b)), or Formula (VI) (e.g., (VI-a) or (VI-b)).
  • a compound of the Formula (I), Formula (II) e.g., (II-a), (II-b)
  • Formula (III) e.g., (III-a), (III-b)
  • Formula (IV) Formula (V) (e.g., (V-a), (V-b)
  • Formula (VI)
  • a method for treating a CNS-related disorder in a subject in need thereof comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound as described herein, e.g., a compound of the Formula (I), Formula (II) (e.g., (II-a), (II-b)), Formula (III) (e.g., (III-a), (III-b)), Formula (IV), Formula (V) (e.g., (V-a), (V-b)), or Formula (VI) (e.g., (VI-a) or (VI-b)), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • a compound as described herein e.g., a compound of the Formula (I), Formula (II) (e.g., (II-a), (II-b)), Formula (III) (e.g., (III-a), (III-b)), Formula (IV), Formula (V) (e.g., (V-a), (V-b)), or Formula (VI)
  • the CNS-related disorder is a sleep disorder, a mood disorder such as depression, a schizophrenia spectrum disorder, a convulsive disorder, a disorder of memory and/or cognition, a movement disorder, a personality disorder, autism spectrum disorder, pain, traumatic brain injury, a vascular disease, a substance abuse disorder and/or withdrawal syndrome, or tinnitus.
  • the subject is a subject with Rett syndrome, Fragile X syndrome, or Angelman syndrome.
  • kits comprising a solid composition comprising a compound as described herein, e.g., a compound of the Formula (I), Formula (II) (e.g., (II-a), (II-b)), Formula (III) (e.g., (III-a), (III-b)), Formula (IV), Formula (V) (e.g., (V-a), (V-b)), or Formula (VI) (e.g., (VI-a) or (VI-b)), and a sterile diluent.
  • a compound of the Formula (I), Formula (II) e.g., (II-a), (II-b)
  • Formula (III) e.g., (III-a), (III-b)
  • Formula (IV) Formula (V) (e.g., (V-a), (V-b)
  • Formula (VI) e.g., (VI-a) or (VI-b)
  • a sterile diluent
  • the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the present invention (also referred to as the “active ingredient”) and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises an effective amount of the active ingredient.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises a therapeutically effective amount of the active ingredient.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises a prophylactically effective amount of the active ingredient.
  • compositions provided herein can be administered by a variety of routes including, but not limited to, oral (enteral) administration, parenteral (by injection) administration, rectal administration, transdermal administration, intradermal administration, intrathecal administration, subcutaneous (SC) administration, intravenous (IV) administration, intramuscular (IM) administration, and intranasal administration.
  • the compounds provided herein are administered in an effective amount.
  • the amount of the compound actually administered will typically be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
  • the compounds provided herein When used to prevent the onset of a CNS-disorder, the compounds provided herein will be administered to a subject at risk for developing the condition, typically on the advice and under the supervision of a physician, at the dosage levels described above.
  • Subjects at risk for developing a particular condition generally include those that have a family history of the condition, or those who have been identified by genetic testing or screening to be particularly susceptible to developing the condition.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein can also be administered chronically (“chronic administration”).
  • Chronic administration refers to administration of a compound or pharmaceutical composition thereof over an extended period of time, e.g., for example, over 3 months, 6 months, 1 year, 2 years, 3 years, 5 years, etc, or may be continued indefinitely, for example, for the rest of the subject's life.
  • the chronic administration is intended to provide a constant level of the compound in the blood, e.g., within the therapeutic window over the extended period of time.
  • the pharmaceutical composition may be given as a bolus, e.g., in order to raise the concentration of the compound in the blood to an effective level.
  • the placement of the bolus dose depends on the systemic levels of the active ingredient desired throughout the body, e.g., an intramuscular or subcutaneous bolus dose allows a slow release of the active ingredient, while a bolus delivered directly to the veins (e.g., through an IV drip) allows a much faster delivery which quickly raises the concentration of the active ingredient in the blood to an effective level.
  • the pharmaceutical composition may be administered as a continuous infusion, e.g., by IV drip, to provide maintenance of a steady-state concentration of the active ingredient in the subject's body.
  • the pharmaceutical composition may be administered as first as a bolus dose, followed by continuous infusion.
  • compositions for oral administration can take the form of bulk liquid solutions or suspensions, or bulk powders. More commonly, however, the compositions are presented in unit dosage forms to facilitate accurate dosing.
  • unit dosage forms refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient.
  • Typical unit dosage forms include prefilled, premeasured ampules or syringes of the liquid compositions or pills, tablets, capsules or the like in the case of solid compositions.
  • the compound is usually a minor component (from about 0.1 to about 50% by weight or preferably from about 1 to about 40% by weight) with the remainder being various vehicles or excipients and processing aids helpful for forming the desired dosing form.
  • each dose provides from about 0.01 to about 20 mg/kg of the compound provided herein, with preferred doses each providing from about 0.1 to about 10 mg/kg, and especially about 1 to about 5 mg/kg.
  • Transdermal doses are generally selected to provide similar or lower blood levels than are achieved using injection doses, generally in an amount ranging from about 0.01 to about 20% by weight, preferably from about 0.1 to about 20% by weight, preferably from about 0.1 to about 10% by weight, and more preferably from about 0.5 to about 15% by weight.
  • Injection dose levels range from about 0.1 mg/kg/hour to at least 20 mg/kg/hour, all for from about 1 to about 120 hours and especially 24 to 96 hours.
  • a preloading bolus of from about 0.1 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg or more may also be administered to achieve adequate steady state levels.
  • the maximum total dose is not expected to exceed about 5 g/day for a 40 to 80 kg human patient.
  • Liquid forms suitable for oral administration may include a suitable aqueous or nonaqueous vehicle with buffers, suspending and dispensing agents, colorants, flavors and the like.
  • Solid forms may include, for example, any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.
  • a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin
  • an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch
  • Injectable compositions are typically based upon injectable sterile saline or phosphate-buffered saline or other injectable excipients known in the art.
  • the active compound in such compositions is typically a minor component, often being from about 0.05 to 10% by weight with the remainder being the injectable excipient and the like.
  • Transdermal compositions are typically formulated as a topical ointment or cream containing the active ingredient(s).
  • the active ingredients When formulated as a ointment, the active ingredients will typically be combined with either a paraffinic or a water-miscible ointment base. Alternatively, the active ingredients may be formulated in a cream with, for example an oil-in-water cream base.
  • Such transdermal formulations are well-known in the art and generally include additional ingredients to enhance the dermal penetration of stability of the active ingredients or Formulation. All such known transdermal formulations and ingredients are included within the scope provided herein.
  • transdermal administration can be accomplished using a patch either of the reservoir or porous membrane type, or of a solid matrix variety.
  • the compounds of the present invention can also be administered in sustained release forms or from sustained release drug delivery systems.
  • sustained release materials can be found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences.
  • the present invention also relates to the pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt of a compound of the present invention.
  • the acid which may be used to prepare the pharmaceutically acceptable salt is that which forms a non-toxic acid addition salt, i.e., a salt containing pharmacologically acceptable anions such as the hydrochloride, hydroiodide, hydrobromide, nitrate, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, acetate, lactate, citrate, tartrate, succinate, maleate, fumarate, benzoate, para-toluenesulfonate, and the like.
  • a non-toxic acid addition salt i.e., a salt containing pharmacologically acceptable anions such as the hydrochloride, hydroiodide, hydrobromide, nitrate, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, acetate, lactate, citrate, tartrate, succinate, maleate, fumarate, benzoate, para-toluen
  • the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the present invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, e.g., a composition suitable for injection, such as for intravenous (IV) administration.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient e.g., a composition suitable for injection, such as for intravenous (IV) administration.
  • compositions agents include any and all diluents or other liquid vehicles, dispersion or suspension aids, surface active agents, isotonic agents, preservatives, lubricants and the like, as suited to the particular dosage form desired, e.g., injection.
  • General considerations in the formulation and/or manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions agents can be found, for example, in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences , Sixteenth Edition, E. W. Martin (Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1980), and Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 21 st Edition (Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2005).
  • injectable preparations such as sterile injectable aqueous suspensions
  • suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents exemplary excipients that can be employed include, but are not limited to, water, sterile saline or phosphate-buffered saline, or Ringer's solution.
  • the pharmaceutical composition further comprises a cyclodextrin derivative.
  • the most common cyclodextrins are ⁇ -, ⁇ - and ⁇ -cyclodextrins consisting of 6, 7 and 8 ⁇ -1,4-linked glucose units, respectively, optionally comprising one or more substituents on the linked sugar moieties, which include, but are not limited to, substituted or unsubstituted methylated, hydroxyalkylated, acylated, and sulfoalkylether substitution.
  • the cyclodextrin is a sulfoalkyl ether ⁇ -cyclodextrin, e.g., for example, sulfobutyl ether ⁇ -cyclodextrin, also known as Captisol®. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,376,645.
  • the composition comprises hexapropyl- ⁇ -cyclodextrin. In a more particular embodiment, the composition comprises hexapropyl- ⁇ -cyclodextrin (10-50% in water).
  • the injectable composition can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable medium prior to use.
  • the compounds provided herein are administered in an effective amount.
  • the amount of the compound actually administered will typically be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered, the age, weight, response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
  • compositions are presented in unit dosage forms to facilitate accurate dosing.
  • unit dosage forms refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient.
  • Typical unit dosage forms include pre-filled, pre-measured ampules or syringes of the liquid compositions.
  • the compound is usually a minor component (from about 0.1% to about 50% by weight or preferably from about 1% to about 40% by weight) with the remainder being various vehicles or carriers and processing aids helpful for forming the desired dosing form.
  • the compounds provided herein can be administered as the sole active agent, or they can be administered in combination with other active agents.
  • the present invention provides a combination of a compound of the present invention and another pharmacologically active agent. Administration in combination can proceed by any technique apparent to those of skill in the art including, for example, separate, sequential, concurrent, and alternating administration.
  • compositions are principally directed to pharmaceutical compositions which are suitable for administration to humans, it will be understood by the skilled artisan that such compositions are generally suitable for administration to animals of all sorts. Modification of pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration to humans in order to render the compositions suitable for administration to various animals is well understood, and the ordinarily skilled veterinary pharmacologist can design and/or perform such modification with ordinary experimentation. General considerations in the formulation and/or manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions can be found, for example, in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy 21 st ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2005.
  • the present invention is directed to C21-substituted neuroactive steroids designed, for example, to act as GABA modulators.
  • such compounds are envisioned to be useful as therapeutic agents for the inducement of anesthesia and/or sedation in a subject.
  • such compounds are envisioned to be useful as therapeutic agents for treating a CNS-related disorder (e.g., sleep disorder, a mood disorder such as depression, a schizophrenia spectrum disorder, a convulsive disorder, a disorder of memory and/or cognition, a movement disorder, a personality disorder, autism spectrum disorder, pain, traumatic brain injury, a vascular disease, a substance abuse disorder and/or withdrawal syndrome, or tinnitus) in a subject in need (e.g., a subject with Rett syndrome, Fragile X syndrome, or Angelman syndrome).
  • a CNS-related disorder e.g., sleep disorder, a mood disorder such as depression, a schizophrenia spectrum disorder, a convulsive disorder, a disorder of memory and/or cognition, a movement disorder, a personality disorder, autism spectrum disorder, pain, traumatic brain injury, a vascular disease, a substance abuse disorder and/or withdrawal syndrome, or tinnitus
  • a subject in need e.g., a subject
  • the present invention provides a method of inducing sedation and/or anesthesia in a subject, comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the present invention or a composition thereof.
  • the compound is administered by intravenous administration.
  • Compounds of the present invention are generally designed to modulate GABA function, and therefore to act as neuroactive steroids for the treatment and prevention of CNS-related conditions in a subject.
  • Modulation refers to the inhibition or potentiation of GABA receptor function.
  • the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions provided herein find use as therapeutics for preventing and/or treating CNS conditions in mammals including humans and non-human mammals.
  • the present invention includes within its scope, and extends to, the recited methods of treatment, as well as to the compounds for such methods, and to the use of such compounds for the preparation of medicaments useful for such methods.
  • Exemplary CNS conditions related to GABA-modulation include, but are not limited to, sleep disorders [e.g., insomnia], mood disorders [e.g., depression, dysthymic disorder (e.g., mild depression), bipolar disorder (e.g., I and/or II), anxiety disorders (e.g., generalized anxiety disorder (GAD), social anxiety disorder), stress, post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD), compulsive disorders (e.g., obsessive compulsive disorder (OCD))], schizophrenia spectrum disorders [e.g., schizophrenia, schizoaffective disorder], convulsive disorders [e.g., epilepsy (e.g., status epilepticus (SE)), seizures], disorders of memory and/or cognition [e.g., attention disorders (e.g., attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD)), dementia (e.g., Alzheimer's type dementia, Lewis body type dementia, vascular type dementia], movement disorders [e.g., Huntington's disease, Parkinson's disease], personality disorders [e
  • a combination of a compound of the present invention and another pharmacologically active agent is provided.
  • the compounds provided herein can be administered as the sole active agent or they can be administered in combination with other agents. Administration in combination can proceed by any technique apparent to those of skill in the art including, for example, separate, sequential, concurrent and alternating administration.
  • a method of treating or preventing brain excitability in a subject susceptible to or afflicted with a condition associated with brain excitability comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the present invention to the subject.
  • a method of treating or preventing stress or anxiety in a subject comprising administering to the subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound of the present invention, or a composition thereof.
  • a method of alleviating or preventing seizure activity in a subject comprising administering to the subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound of the present invention.
  • a method of alleviating or preventing insomnia in a subject comprising administering to the subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound of the present invention, or a composition thereof.
  • a method of inducing sleep and maintaining substantially the level of REM sleep that is found in normal sleep, wherein substantial rebound insomnia is not induced comprising administering an effective amount of a compound of the present invention.
  • a method of alleviating or preventing PMS or PND in a subject comprising administering to the subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound of the present invention.
  • a method of treating or preventing mood disorders in a subject comprising administering to the subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound of the present invention.
  • the mood disorder is depression.
  • a method of inducing anesthesia in a subject comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the present invention.
  • a method of cognition enhancement or treating memory disorder by administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention.
  • the disorder is Alzheimer's disease.
  • the disorder is Rett syndrome.
  • a method of treating attention disorders by administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention.
  • the attention disorder is ADHD.
  • the compound is administered to the subject chronically. In certain embodiments, the compound is administered to the subject orally, subcutaneously, intramuscularly, or intravenously.
  • Anesthesia is a pharmacologically induced and reversible state of amnesia, analgesia, loss of responsiveness, loss of skeletal muscle reflexes, decreased stress response, or all of these simultaneously. These effects can be obtained from a single drug which alone provides the correct combination of effects, or occasionally with a combination of drugs (e.g., hypnotics, sedatives, paralytics, analgesics) to achieve very specific combinations of results. Anesthesia allows patients to undergo surgery and other procedures without the distress and pain they would otherwise experience.
  • drugs e.g., hypnotics, sedatives, paralytics, analgesics
  • Sedation is the reduction of irritability or agitation by administration of a pharmacological agent, generally to facilitate a medical procedure or diagnostic procedure.
  • Sedation and analgesia include a continuum of states of consciousness ranging from minimal sedation (anxiolysis) to general anesthesia.
  • Minimal sedation is also known as anxiolysis. Minimal sedation is a drug-induced state during which the patient responds normally to verbal commands. Cognitive function and coordination may be impaired. Ventilatory and cardiovascular functions are typically unaffected.
  • Moderate sedation/analgesia is a drug-induced depression of consciousness during which the patient responds purposefully to verbal command, either alone or accompanied by light tactile stimulation. No interventions are usually necessary to maintain a patent airway. Spontaneous ventilation is typically adequate. Cardiovascular function is usually maintained.
  • Deep sedation/analgesia is a drug-induced depression of consciousness during which the patient cannot be easily aroused, but responds purposefully (not a reflex withdrawal from a painful stimulus) following repeated or painful stimulation.
  • Independent ventilatory function may be impaired and the patient may require assistance to maintain a patent airway.
  • Spontaneous ventilation may be inadequate. Cardiovascular function is usually maintained.
  • General anesthesia is a drug-induced loss of consciousness during which the patient is not arousable, even to painful stimuli.
  • the ability to maintain independent ventilatory function is often impaired and assistance is often required to maintain a patent airway.
  • Positive pressure ventilation may be required due to depressed spontaneous ventilation or drug-induced depression of neuromuscular function.
  • Cardiovascular function may be impaired.
  • Sedation in the intensive care unit allows the depression of patients' awareness of the environment and reduction of their response to external stimulation. It can play a role in the care of the critically ill patient, and encompasses a wide spectrum of symptom control that will vary between patients, and among individuals throughout the course of their illnesses. Heavy sedation in critical care has been used to facilitate endotracheal tube tolerance and ventilator synchronization, often with neuromuscular blocking agents.
  • sedation e.g., long-term sedation, continuous sedation
  • a prolonged period of time e.g., 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 5 days, 1 week, 2 week, 3 weeks, 1 month, 2 months.
  • Long-term sedation agents may have long duration of action. Sedation agents in the ICU may have short elimination half-life.
  • Procedural sedation and analgesia is a technique of administering sedatives or dissociative agents with or without analgesics to induce a state that allows a subject to tolerate unpleasant procedures while maintaining cardiorespiratory function.
  • Anxiety disorder is a blanket term covering several different forms of abnormal and pathological fear and anxiety.
  • Current psychiatric diagnostic criteria recognize a wide variety of anxiety disorders.
  • Generalized anxiety disorder is a common chronic disorder characterized by long-lasting anxiety that is not focused on any one object or situation. Those suffering from generalized anxiety experience non-specific persistent fear and worry and become overly concerned with everyday matters. Generalized anxiety disorder is the most common anxiety disorder to affect older adults.
  • panic disorder a person suffers from brief attacks of intense terror and apprehension, often marked by trembling, shaking, confusion, dizziness, nausea, difficulty breathing.
  • panic attacks defined by the APA as fear or discomfort that abruptly arises and peaks in less than ten minutes, can last for several hours and can be triggered by stress, fear, or even exercise; although the specific cause is not always apparent.
  • a diagnosis of panic disorder also requires that said attacks have chronic consequences: either worry over the attacks' potential implications, persistent fear of future attacks, or significant changes in behavior related to the attacks. Accordingly, those suffering from panic disorder experience symptoms even outside of specific panic episodes.
  • Obsessive compulsive disorder is a type of anxiety disorder primarily characterized by repetitive obsessions (distressing, persistent, and intrusive thoughts or images) and compulsions (urges to perform specific acts or rituals).
  • the OCD thought pattern may be likened to superstitions insofar as it involves a belief in a causative relationship where, in reality, one does not exist.
  • the process is entirely illogical; for example, the compulsion of walking in a certain pattern may be employed to alleviate the obsession of impending harm.
  • the compulsion is entirely inexplicable, simply an urge to complete a ritual triggered by nervousness.
  • sufferers of OCD may only experience obsessions, with no overt compulsions; a much smaller number of sufferers experience only compulsions.
  • Phobia The single largest category of anxiety disorders is that of Phobia, which includes all cases in which fear and anxiety is triggered by a specific stimulus or situation. Sufferers typically anticipate cosmic consequences from encountering the object of their fear, which can be anything from an animal to a location to a bodily fluid.
  • Post-traumatic stress disorder or PTSD is an anxiety disorder which results from a traumatic experience.
  • Post-traumatic stress can result from an extreme situation, such as combat, rape, hostage situations, or even serious accident. It can also result from long term (chronic) exposure to a severe stressor, for example soldiers who endure individual battles but cannot cope with continuous combat. Common symptoms include flashbacks, avoidant behaviors, and depression.
  • neurodegenerative disease includes diseases and disorders that are associated with the progressive loss of structure or function of neurons, or death of neurons.
  • Neurodegenerative diseases and disorders include, but are not limited to, Alzheimer's disease (including the associated symptoms of mild, moderate, or severe cognitive impairment); amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS); anoxic and ischemic injuries; ataxia and convulsion (including for the treatment and prevention and prevention of seizures that are caused by schizoaffective disorder or by drugs used to treat schizophrenia); benign forgetfulness; brain edema; cerebellar ataxia including McLeod neuroacanthocytosis syndrome (MLS); closed head injury; coma; contusive injuries (e.g., spinal cord injury and head injury); dementias including multi-infarct dementia and senile dementia; disturbances of consciousness; Down syndrome; drug-induced or medication-induced Parkinsonism (such as neuroleptic-induced acute akathisia, acute dystonia, Parkinsonism, or tardive dyskinesia, neuroleptic malignant
  • Neurodegenerative diseases also include, but are not limited to, neurotoxic injury which follows cerebral stroke, thromboembolic stroke, hemorrhagic stroke, cerebral ischemia, cerebral vasospasm, hypoglycemia, amnesia, hypoxia, anoxia, perinatal asphyxia and cardiac arrest.
  • Methods of treating or preventing a neurodegenerative disease also include treating or preventing loss of neuronal function characteristic of neurodegenerative disorder.
  • Epilepsy is a brain disorder characterized by repeated seizures over time.
  • Types of epilepsy can include, but are not limited to generalized epilepsy, e.g., childhood absence epilepsy, juvenile nyoclonic epilepsy, epilepsy with grand-mal seizures on awakening, West syndrome, Lennox-Gastaut syndrome, partial epilepsy, e.g., temporal lobe epilepsy, frontal lobe epilepsy, benign focal epilepsy of childhood.
  • Status epilepticus can include, e.g., convulsive status epilepticus, e.g., early status epilepticus, established status epilepticus, refractory status epilepticus, super-refractory status epilepticus; non-convulsive status epilepticus, e.g., generalized status epilepticus, complex partial status epilepticus; generalized periodic epileptiform discharges; and periodic lateralized epileptiform discharges.
  • Convulsive status epilepticus is characterized by the presence of convulsive status epileptic seizures, and can include early status epilepticus, established status epilepticus, refractory status epilepticus, super-refractory status epilepticus.
  • Early status epilepticus is treated with a first line therapy.
  • Established status epilepticus is characterized by status epileptic seizures which persist despite treatment with a first line therapy, and a second line therapy is administered.
  • Refractory status epilepticus is characterized by status epileptic seizures which persist despite treatment with a first line and a second line therapy, and a general anesthetic is generally administered.
  • Super refractory status epilepticus is characterized by status epileptic seizures which persist despite treatment with a first line therapy, a second line therapy, and a general anesthetic for 24 hours or more.
  • Non-convulsive status epilepticus can include, e.g., focal non-convulsive status epilepticus, e.g., complex partial non-convulsive status epilepticus, simple partial non-convulsive status epilepticus, subtle non-convulsive status epilepticus; generalized non-convulsive status epilepticus, e.g., late onset absence non-convulsive status epilepticus, atypical absence non-convulsive status epilepticus, or typical absence non-convulsive status epilepticus.
  • focal non-convulsive status epilepticus e.g., complex partial non-convulsive status epilepticus, simple partial non-convulsive status epilepticus, subtle non-convulsive status epilepticus
  • generalized non-convulsive status epilepticus e.g., late onset absence non-convulsive status epilepticus, atypical absence non-convulsive
  • compositions described herein can also be administered as a prophylactic to a subject having a CNS disorder e.g., a traumatic brain injury, status epilepticus, e.g., convulsive status epilepticus, e.g., early status epilepticus, established status epilepticus, refractory status epilepticus, super-refractory status epilepticus; non-convulsive status epilepticus, e.g., generalized status epilepticus, complex partial status epilepticus; generalized periodic epileptiform discharges; and periodic lateralized epileptiform discharges; prior to the onset of a seizure.
  • a CNS disorder e.g., a traumatic brain injury
  • status epilepticus e.g., convulsive status epilepticus, e.g., early status epilepticus, established status epilepticus, refractory status epilepticus, super-refractory status epilepticus
  • a seizure is the physical findings or changes in behavior that occur after an episode of abnormal electrical activity in the brain.
  • the term “seizure” is often used interchangeably with “convulsion.” Convulsions are when a person's body shakes rapidly and uncontrollably. During convulsions, the person's muscles contract and relax repeatedly.
  • seizures are divided into two broad categories: generalized and partial (also called local or focal). Classifying the type of seizure helps doctors diagnose whether or not a patient has epilepsy.
  • Generalized seizures are produced by electrical impulses from throughout the entire brain, whereas partial seizures are produced (at least initially) by electrical impulses in a relatively small part of the brain.
  • the part of the brain generating the seizures is sometimes called the focus.
  • Absence seizures cause a short loss of consciousness (just a few seconds) with few or no symptoms.
  • the patient most often a child, typically interrupts an activity and stares blankly. These seizures begin and end abruptly and may occur several times a day. Patients are usually not aware that they are having a seizure, except that they may be aware of “losing time.”
  • Myoclonic seizures consist of sporadic jerks, usually on both sides of the body. Patients sometimes describe the jerks as brief electrical shocks. When violent, these seizures may result in dropping or involuntarily throwing objects.
  • Clonic seizures are repetitive, rhythmic jerks that involve both sides of the body at the same time.
  • Tonic seizures are characterized by stiffening of the muscles.
  • Atonic seizures consist of a sudden and general loss of muscle tone, particularly in the arms and legs, which often results in a fall.
  • Seizures described herein can include epileptic seizures; acute repetitive seizures; cluster seizures; continuous seizures; unremitting seizures; prolonged seizures; recurrent seizures; status epilepticus seizures, e.g., refractory convulsive status epilepticus, non-convulsive status epilepticus seizures; refractory seizures; myoclonic seizures; tonic seizures; tonic-clonic seizures; simple partial seizures; complex partial seizures; secondarily generalized seizures; atypical absence seizures; absence seizures; atonic seizures; benign Rolandic seizures; febrile seizures; emotional seizures; focal seizures; gelastic seizures; generalized onset seizures; infantile spasms; Jacksonian seizures; massive bilateral myoclonus seizures; multifocal seizures; neonatal onset seizures; nocturnal seizures; occipital lobe seizures; post traumatic seizures; subtle seizures; Sylvan seizures; visual reflex seizures; or withdrawal seizures.
  • status epilepticus seizures e.g., refractory convulsive status epilepticus, non
  • the invention encompasses all variations, combinations, and permutations in which one or more limitations, elements, clauses, and descriptive terms from one or more of the listed claims is introduced into another claim.
  • any claim that is dependent on another claim can be modified to include one or more limitations found in any other claim that is dependent on the same base claim.
  • elements are presented as lists, e.g., in Markush group format, each subgroup of the elements is also disclosed, and any element(s) can be removed from the group. It should it be understood that, in general, where the invention, or aspects of the invention, is/are referred to as comprising particular elements and/or features, certain embodiments of the invention or aspects of the invention consist, or consist essentially of, such elements and/or features.
  • protecting groups may be necessary to prevent certain functional groups from undergoing undesired reactions.
  • the choice of a suitable protecting group for a particular functional group as well as suitable conditions for protection and deprotection are well known in the art. For example, numerous protecting groups, and their introduction and removal, are described in T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis , Second Edition, Wiley, New York, 1991, and references cited therein.
  • the compounds provided herein may be isolated and purified by known standard procedures. Such procedures include (but are not limited to) recrystallization, column chromatography, HPLC, or supercritical fluid chromatography (SFC). The following schemes are presented with details as to the preparation of representative heteroaryls and heterocyclyls that have been listed herein.
  • the compounds provided herein may be prepared from known or commercially available starting materials and reagents by one skilled in the art of organic synthesis.
  • Exemplary chiral columns available for use in the separation/purification of the enantiomers/diastereomers provided herein include, but are not limited to, CHIRALPAK® AD-10, CHIRALCEL® OB, CHIRALCEL® OB-H, CHIRALCEL® OD, CHIRALCEL® OD-H, CHIRALCEL® OF, CHIRALCEL® OG, CHIRALCEL® OJ and CHIRALCEL® OK.
  • stereochemistry assigned herein e.g., the assignment of “R” or “S” to the C21 position of the steroid
  • a C21 position may be drawn in the “R” configuration when the C21 position is in the “S” configuration.
  • 1 H-NMR reported herein may be a partial representation of the full NMR spectrum of a compound, e.g., a compound described herein.
  • the reported 1 H NMR may exclude the region between ⁇ (ppm) of about 1 to about 2.5 ppm.
  • cortices are rapidly removed following decapitation of carbon dioxide-anesthetized Sprague-Dawley rats (200-250 g).
  • the cortices are homogenized in 10 volumes of ice-cold 0.32 M sucrose using a glass/teflon homogenizer and centrifuged at 1500 ⁇ g for 10 min at 4° C.
  • the resultant supernatants are centrifuged at 10,000 ⁇ g for 20 min at 4° C. to obtain the P2 pellets.
  • the P2 pellets are resuspended in 200 mM NaCl/50 mM Na—K phosphate pH 7.4 buffer and centrifuged at 10,000 ⁇ g for 10 min at 4° C.
  • the concentration of test compound producing 50% inhibition (IC 50 ) of specific binding and the maximal extent of inhibition (I max ) are determined for the individual experiments with the same model used for the overall data and then the means ⁇ SEM.s of the individual experiments are calculated.
  • Picrotoxin serves as the positive control for these studies as it has been demonstrated to robustly inhibit TBPS binding.
  • A indicates an IC 50 ⁇ 50 nM
  • B indicates an IC 50 of 50 nM to 100 nM
  • C indicates an IC 50 100 nM to 250 nM
  • D indicates an IC 50 of 250 nM to 500 nM
  • E indicates IC 50 >500 nM.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Dermatology (AREA)
  • Nutrition Science (AREA)
  • Physiology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Steroid Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)

Abstract

Described herein are neuroactive steroids of the Formula (I): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; wherein, R1, R2a, R2b, R3 and A are as defined herein. Such compounds are envisioned, in certain embodiments, to behave as GABA modulators. The present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising a compound of the present invention and methods of use and treatment, e.g., such for inducing sedation and/or anesthesia.
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00001

Description

    RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/064,957, filed Oct. 16, 2014, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Brain excitability is defined as the level of arousal of an animal, a continuum that ranges from coma to convulsions, and is regulated by various neurotransmitters. In general, neurotransmitters are responsible for regulating the conductance of ions across neuronal membranes. At rest, the neuronal membrane possesses a potential (or membrane voltage) of approximately −70 mV, the cell interior being negative with respect to the cell exterior. The potential (voltage) is the result of ion (K+, Na+, Cl, organic anions) balance across the neuronal semipermeable membrane. Neurotransmitters are stored in presynaptic vesicles and are released under the influence of neuronal action potentials. When released into the synaptic cleft, an excitatory chemical transmitter such as acetylcholine will cause membrane depolarization, e.g., a change of potential from −70 mV to −50 mV. This effect is mediated by postsynaptic nicotinic receptors which are stimulated by acetylcholine to increase membrane permeability to Na+ ions. The reduced membrane potential stimulates neuronal excitability in the form of a postsynaptic action potential.
  • In the case of the GABA receptor complex (GRC), the effect on brain excitability is mediated by GABA, a neurotransmitter. GABA has a profound influence on overall brain excitability because up to 40% of the neurons in the brain utilize GABA as a neurotransmitter. GABA regulates the excitability of individual neurons by regulating the conductance of chloride ions across the neuronal membrane. GABA interacts with its recognition site on the GRC to facilitate the flow of chloride ions down an electrochemical gradient of the GRC into the cell. An intracellular increase in the levels of this anion causes hyperpolarization of the transmembrane potential, rendering the neuron less susceptible to excitatory inputs, i.e., reduced neuron excitability. In other words, the higher the chloride ion concentration in the neuron, the lower the brain excitability and level of arousal.
  • It is well-documented that the GRC is responsible for the mediation of anxiety, seizure activity, and sedation. Thus, GABA and drugs that act like GABA or facilitate the effects of GABA (e.g., the therapeutically useful barbiturates and benzodiazepines (BZs), such as Valium®) produce their therapeutically useful effects by interacting with specific regulatory sites on the GRC. Accumulated evidence has now indicated that in addition to the benzodiazepine and barbiturate binding site, the GRC contains a distinct site for neuroactive steroids. See, e.g., Lan, N. C. et al., Neurochem. Res. (1991) 16:347-356.
  • Neuroactive steroids can occur endogenously. The most potent endogenous neuroactive steroids are 3α-hydroxy-5-reduced pregnan-20-one and 3α-21-dihydroxy-5-reduced pregnan-20-one, metabolites of hormonal steroids progesterone and deoxycorticosterone, respectively. The ability of these steroid metabolites to alter brain excitability was recognized in 1986 (Majewska, M. D. et al., Science 232:1004-1007 (1986); Harrison, N. L. et al., J Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 241:346-353 (1987)).
  • The ovarian hormone progesterone and its metabolites have been demonstrated to have profound effects on brain excitability (Backstrom, T. et al., Acta Obstet. Gynecol. Scand. Suppl. 130:19-24 (1985); Pfaff, D. W and McEwen, B. S., Science 219:808-814 (1983); Gyermek et al., J Med Chem. 11: 117 (1968); Lambert, J. et al., Trends Pharmacol. Sci. 8:224-227 (1987)). The levels of progesterone and its metabolites vary with the phases of the menstrual cycle. It has been well documented that the levels of progesterone and its metabolites decrease prior to the onset of menses. The monthly recurrence of certain physical symptoms prior to the onset of menses has also been well documented. These symptoms, which have become associated with premenstrual syndrome (PMS), include stress, anxiety, and migraine headaches (Dalton, K., Premenstrual Syndrome and Progesterone Therapy, 2nd edition, Chicago Yearbook, Chicago (1984)). Subjects with PMS have a monthly recurrence of symptoms that are present in premenses and absent in postmenses.
  • In a similar fashion, a reduction in progesterone has also been temporally correlated with an increase in seizure frequency in female epileptics, i.e., catamenial epilepsy (Laidlaw, J., Lancet, 1235-1237 (1956)). A more direct correlation has been observed with a reduction in progesterone metabolites (Rosciszewska et al., J. Neurol. Neurosurg. Psych. 49:47-51 (1986)). In addition, for subjects with primary generalized petit mal epilepsy, the temporal incidence of seizures has been correlated with the incidence of the symptoms of premenstrual syndrome (Backstrom, T. et al., J. Psychosom. Obstet. Gynaecol. 2:8-20 (1983)). The steroid deoxycorticosterone has been found to be effective in treating subjects with epileptic spells correlated with their menstrual cycles (Aird, R. B. and Gordan, G., J. Amer. Med. Soc. 145:715-719 (1951)).
  • A syndrome also related to low progesterone levels is postnatal depression (PND). Immediately after birth, progesterone levels decrease dramatically leading to the onset of PND. The symptoms of PND range from mild depression to psychosis requiring hospitalization. PND is also associated with severe anxiety and irritability. PND-associated depression is not amenable to treatment by classic antidepressants, and women experiencing PND show an increased incidence of PMS (Dalton, K., Premenstrual Syndrome and Progesterone Therapy, 2nd edition, Chicago Yearbook, Chicago (1984)).
  • Collectively, these observations imply a crucial role for progesterone and deoxycorticosterone and more specifically their metabolites in the homeostatic regulation of brain excitability, which is manifested as an increase in seizure activity or symptoms associated with catamenial epilepsy, PMS, and PND. The correlation between reduced levels of progesterone and the symptoms associated with PMS, PND, and catamenial epilepsy (Backstrom, T. et al., J Psychosom. Obstet. Gynaecol. 2:8-20 (1983)); Dalton, K., Premenstrual Syndrome and Progesterone Therapy, 2nd edition, Chicago Yearbook, Chicago (1984)) has prompted the use of progesterone in their treatment (Mattson et al., “Medroxyprogesterone therapy of catamenial epilepsy,” in Advances in Epileptology: XVth Epilepsy International Symposium, Raven Press, New York (1984), pp. 279-282, and Dalton, K., Premenstrual Syndrome and Progesterone Therapy, 2nd edition, Chicago Yearbook, Chicago (1984)). However, progesterone is not consistently effective in the treatment of the aforementioned syndromes. For example, no dose-response relationship exists for progesterone in the treatment of PMS (Maddocks et al., Obstet. Gynecol. 154:573-581 (1986); Dennerstein et al., Brit. Med J 290:16-17 (1986)).
  • New and improved neuroactive steroids are needed that act as modulating agents for brain excitability, as well as agents for the prevention and treatment of CNS-related diseases. The compounds, compositions, and methods described herein are directed toward this end.
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • Provided herein are C21-substituted neuroactive steroids designed, for example, to act as GABA modulators. In certain embodiments, such compounds are envisioned to be useful as therapeutic agents for the inducement of anesthesia and/or sedation in a subject. In some embodiments, such compounds are envisioned to be useful as therapeutic agents for treating a CNS-related disorder (e.g., sleep disorder, a mood disorder such as depression, a schizophrenia spectrum disorder, a convulsive disorder, a disorder of memory and/or cognition, a movement disorder, a personality disorder, autism spectrum disorder, pain, traumatic brain injury, a vascular disease, a substance abuse disorder and/or withdrawal syndrome, or tinnitus) in a subject in need (e.g., a subject with Rett syndrome, Fragile X syndrome, or Angelman syndrome).
  • In one aspect, provided is a compound of Formula (I):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00002
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl; R1 is C1-6 alkyl; R2a is C1-6 alkyl; R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl; or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group; or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring (e.g., a 3-6-membered ring (e.g., carbocycyl or heterocyclyl ring)); R3 is absent or hydrogen; and
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, the other
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a single bond; and when one of the
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, R3 is absent.
  • In some embodiments, R1 is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl (e.g., haloalkyl). In some embodiments, R1 is methyl or CF3.
  • In some embodiments, R2a is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R2a is methyl. In some embodiments, R2b is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R2b is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R2a is methyl. In some embodiments, R2a is methyl and R2b is hydrogen.
  • In some embodiments, R3 is absent. In some embodiments, R3 is hydrogen.
  • In some embodiments,
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single bond. In some embodiments, one of
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a double bond and the other
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single bond.
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (II) or Formula (III):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00003
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein A, R1, R2a, and R2b are defined as for Formula (I).
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (II) is a compound of Formula (II-a) or Formula (II-b):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00004
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein A and R1 are defined as for Formula (I).
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (III) is a compound of Formula (III-a) or Formula (III-b):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00005
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein A and R1 are defined as for Formula (I).
  • In some embodiments, A is heterocyclyl or heteroaryl (e.g., nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl or a nitrogen-containing heteroaryl). In some embodiments, A is monocyclic or bicyclic. In some embodiments, A is substituted with at least one RA, wherein RA is C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-6 carbocylyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, halogen, cyano, —ORA6, —C(═O)ORA6, —SRB6, —S(═O)RB6, or S(═O)2RB6, wherein RA6 is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-6 carbocylyl, or C1-6 haloalkyl, and RB6 is C1-6 alkyl or C3-6 carbocylyl. In some embodiments, RA is C1-6 alkyl, halogen, or cyano. In some embodiments, A is substituted with 1-3 instances of RA.
  • In another aspect, provided is a compound of the Formula (IV):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00006
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof wherein A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl; R1 is C1-6 alkyl; R2a is C1-6 alkyl; R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl; or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group; or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring (e.g., a 3-6-membered ring (e.g., carbocycyl or heterocyclyl ring)); R3 is absent or hydrogen; RA is C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-6 carbocylyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, halogen, cyano, —ORA6, —C(═O)ORA6, —SRB6, —S(═O)RB6, or S(═O)2RB6, wherein RA6 is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-6 carbocylyl, or C1-6 haloalkyl, and RB6 is C1-6 alkyl or C3-6 carbocylyl; n is 0, 1, 2 or 3; and
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, the other
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a single bond; and when one of the
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, R3 is absent.
  • In some embodiments, R1 is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl (e.g., haloalkyl). In some embodiments, R1 is methyl or CF3.
  • In some embodiments, R2a is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R2a is methyl. In some embodiments, R2b is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R2b is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R2a is methyl. In some embodiments, R2a is methyl and R2b is hydrogen.
  • In some embodiments, R3 is absent. In some embodiments, R3 is hydrogen.
  • In some embodiments,
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single bond. In some embodiments, one of
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a double bond and the other
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single bond.
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (IV) is a compound of Formula (V) or Formula (VI):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00007
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein A, R1, R2a, R2b, RA, and n are defined as for Formula (IV).
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (V) is a compound of Formula (V-a) or Formula (V-b):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00008
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein wherein A, R1, R2a, R2b, RA, and n are defined as for Formula (IV).
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (VI) is a compound of Formula (VI-a) or Formula (VI-b):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00009
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein A, R1, are defined as for Formula (I).
  • In some embodiments, A is selected from:
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00010
  • In some embodiments, A is:
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00011
  • In some embodiments, the compound is selected from:
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00012
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00013
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00014
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00015
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • In one aspect, provided is a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the Formula (I) and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
  • In one aspect, provided is a method of inducing sedation and/or anesthesia in a subject, comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the Formula (I):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00016
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl; R1 is C1-6 alkyl; R2a is C1-6 alkyl; R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl; or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group; or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring (e.g., a 3-6-membered ring (e.g., carbocycyl or heterocyclyl ring)); R3 is absent or hydrogen; and
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, the other
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a single bond; and when one of the
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, R3 is absent.
  • In one aspect, provided is a method of administering an effective amount of a compound, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or pharmaceutical composition of a compound of the Formula (I) to a subject in need thereof, wherein the subject experiences sedation and/or anesthesia within two hours of administration.
  • In some embodiments, the subject experiences sedation and/or anesthesia within one hour of administration. In some embodiments, the subject experiences sedation and/or anesthesia instantaneously.
  • In some embodiments, the compound is administered by intravenous administration.
  • In some embodiments, the compound is administered chronically.
  • In some embodiments, the subject is a mammal. In some embodiments, the subject is a human.
  • In some embodiments, the compound is administered in combination with another therapeutic agent.
  • In one aspect, provided is a method for treating seizure in a subject, comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the Formula (I):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00017
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl; R1 is C1-6 alkyl; R2a is C1-6 alkyl; R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl; or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group; or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring (e.g., a 3-6-membered ring (e.g., carbocycyl or heterocyclyl ring)); R3 is absent or hydrogen; and
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    double bond, the other
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a single bond; and when one of the
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, R3 is absent.
  • In one aspect, provided is a method for treating epilepsy or status or status epilepticus in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the Formula (I):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00018
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl; R1 is C1-6 alkyl; R2a is C1-6 alkyl; R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl; or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group; or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring (e.g., a 3-6-membered ring (e.g., carbocycyl or heterocyclyl ring)); R3 is absent or hydrogen; and
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, the other
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a single bond; and when one of the
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, R3 is absent.
  • In one aspect, provided is a method for treating disorders related to GABA function in a subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or pharmaceutical composition of a compound of Formula (I):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00019
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl; R1 is C1-6 alkyl; R2a is C1-6 alkyl; R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl; or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group; or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring (e.g., a 3-6-membered ring (e.g., carbocycyl or heterocyclyl ring)); R3 is absent or hydrogen; and
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, the other
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a single bond; and when one of the
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, R3 is absent.
  • In one aspect, provided is a method for treating a CNS-related disorder in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the Formula (I):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00020
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
  • A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
  • R1 is C1-6 alkyl;
  • R2a is C1-6 alkyl;
  • R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl;
  • or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group;
  • or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring (e.g., a 3-6-membered ring (e.g., carbocycyl or heterocyclyl ring));
  • R3 is absent or hydrogen; and
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, the other
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a single bond; and when one of the
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, R3 is absent.
  • In some embodiments, the CNS-related disorder is a sleep disorder, a mood disorder such as depression, a schizophrenia spectrum disorder, a convulsive disorder, a disorder of memory and/or cognition, a movement disorder, a personality disorder, autism spectrum disorder, pain, traumatic brain injury, a vascular disease, a substance abuse disorder and/or withdrawal syndrome, or tinnitus. In some embodiments, the subject is a subject with Rett syndrome, Fragile X syndrome, or Angelman syndrome.
  • In some embodiments, the compound is administered orally. In some embodiments, the compound is administered intramuscularly.
  • In some embodiments, the CNS-related disorder is depression (e.g., post-partum depression). In some embodiments, the CNS-related disorder is tremor (e.g., essential tremor). In some embodiments, the CNS-related disorder is an eating disorder (e.g., anorexia nervosa, bulimia nervosa, binge-eating disorder, cachexia).
  • In another aspect, provided is a kit comprising a solid composition comprising a compound of Formula (I):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00021
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
  • A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
  • R1 is C1-6 alkyl;
  • R2a is C1-6 alkyl;
  • R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl;
  • or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group;
  • or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring (e.g., a 3-6-membered ring (e.g., carbocycyl or heterocyclyl ring));
  • R3 is absent or hydrogen; and
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, the other
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a single bond; and when one of the
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, R3 is absent;
  • and a sterile diluent.
  • The present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising a compound of the present invention and methods of use and treatment, e.g., such as for inducing sedation and/or anesthesia, for treating a CNS-related disorder.
  • Steroids of Formula (I), sub-genera thereof, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof are collectively referred to herein as “compounds of the present invention.”
  • In another aspect, provided is a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the present invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient. In certain embodiments, the compound of the present invention is provided in an effective amount in the pharmaceutical composition. In certain embodiments, the compound of the present invention is provided in a therapeutically effective amount. In certain embodiments, the compound of the present invention is provided in a prophylactically effective amount.
  • Compounds of the present invention as described herein, act, in certain embodiments, as GABA modulators, e.g., effecting the GABAA receptor in either a positive or negative manner. As modulators of the excitability of the central nervous system (CNS), as mediated by their ability to modulate GABAA receptor, such compounds are expected to have CNS-activity.
  • Thus, in another aspect, provided are methods of treating a CNS-related disorder in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the present invention. In certain embodiments, the CNS-related disorder is selected from the group consisting of a sleep disorder, a mood disorder such as depression, a schizophrenia spectrum disorder, a convulsive disorder, a disorder of memory and/or cognition, a movement disorder, a personality disorder, autism spectrum disorder, pain, traumatic brain injury, a vascular disease, a substance abuse disorder and/or withdrawal syndrome, and tinnitus. In certain embodiments, the compound is administered orally, subcutaneously, intravenously, or intramuscularly. In certain embodiments, the compound is administered chronically. In certain embodiments, the compound is administered continuously, e.g., by continuous intravenous infusion.
  • Other objects and advantages will become apparent to those skilled in the art from a consideration of the ensuing Detailed Description, Examples, and Claims.
  • Definitions Chemical Definitions
  • Definitions of specific functional groups and chemical terms are described in more detail below. The chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS version, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 75th Ed., inside cover, and specific functional groups are generally defined as described therein. Additionally, general principles of organic chemistry, as well as specific functional moieties and reactivity, are described in Thomas Sorrell, Organic Chemistry, University Science Books, Sausalito, 1999; Smith and March, March's Advanced Organic Chemistry, 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 2001; Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers, Inc., New York, 1989; and Carruthers, Some Modern Methods of Organic Synthesis, 3rd Edition, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1987.
  • Compounds described herein can comprise one or more asymmetric centers, and thus can exist in various isomeric forms, e.g., enantiomers and/or diastereomers. For example, the compounds described herein can be in the form of an individual enantiomer, diastereomer or geometric isomer, or can be in the form of a mixture of stereoisomers, including racemic mixtures and mixtures enriched in one or more stereoisomer. Isomers can be isolated from mixtures by methods known to those skilled in the art, including chiral high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) and the formation and crystallization of chiral salts; or preferred isomers can be prepared by asymmetric syntheses. See, for example, Jacques et al., Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions (Wiley Interscience, New York, 1981); Wilen et al., Tetrahedron 33:2725 (1977); Eliel, Stereochemistry of Carbon Compounds (McGraw-Hill, NY, 1962); and Wilen, Tables of Resolving Agents and Optical Resolutions p. 268 (E. L. Eliel, Ed., Univ. of Notre Dame Press, Notre Dame, Ind. 1972). The invention additionally encompasses compounds described herein as individual isomers substantially free of other isomers, and alternatively, as mixtures of various isomers.
  • As used herein a pure enantiomeric compound is substantially free from other enantiomers or stereoisomers of the compound (i.e., in enantiomeric excess). In other words, an “S” form of the compound is substantially free from the “R” form of the compound and is, thus, in enantiomeric excess of the “R” form. The term “enantiomerically pure” or “pure enantiomer” denotes that the compound comprises more than 75% by weight, more than 80% by weight, more than 85% by weight, more than 90% by weight, more than 91% by weight, more than 92% by weight, more than 93% by weight, more than 94% by weight, more than 95% by weight, more than 96% by weight, more than 97% by weight, more than 98% by weight, more than 98.5% by weight, more than 99% by weight, more than 99.2% by weight, more than 99.5% by weight, more than 99.6% by weight, more than 99.7% by weight, more than 99.8% by weight or more than 99.9% by weight, of the enantiomer. In certain embodiments, the weights are based upon total weight of all enantiomers or stereoisomers of the compound.
  • In the compositions provided herein, an enantiomerically pure compound can be present with other active or inactive ingredients. For example, a pharmaceutical composition comprising enantiomerically pure R-compound can comprise, for example, about 90% excipient and about 10% enantiomerically pure R-compound. In certain embodiments, the enantiomerically pure R-compound in such compositions can, for example, comprise, at least about 95% by weight R-compound and at most about 5% by weight S-compound, by total weight of the compound. For example, a pharmaceutical composition comprising enantiomerically pure S-compound can comprise, for example, about 90% excipient and about 10% enantiomerically pure S-compound. In certain embodiments, the enantiomerically pure S-compound in such compositions can, for example, comprise, at least about 95% by weight S-compound and at most about 5% by weight R-compound, by total weight of the compound. In certain embodiments, the active ingredient can be formulated with little or no excipient or carrier.
  • Compound described herein may also comprise one or more isotopic substitutions. For example, H may be in any isotopic form, including 1H, 2H (D or deuterium), and 3H (T or tritium); C may be in any isotopic form, including 12C, 13C, and 14C; O may be in any isotopic form, including 16O and 18O; and the like.
  • The articles “a” and “an” may be used herein to refer to one or to more than one (i.e. at least one) of the grammatical objects of the article. By way of example “an analogue” means one analogue or more than one analogue.
  • When a range of values is listed, it is intended to encompass each value and sub-range within the range. For example “C1-6 alkyl” is intended to encompass, C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6, C1-6, C1-5, C1-4, C1-3, C1-2, C2-6, C2-5, C2-4, C2-3, C3-6, C3-5, C3-4, C4-6, C4-5, and C5-6 alkyl.
  • The following terms are intended to have the meanings presented therewith below and are useful in understanding the description and intended scope of the present invention.
  • “Alkyl” refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched saturated hydrocarbon group having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms (“C1-20 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 12 carbon atoms (“C1-12 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 8 carbon atoms (“C1-8 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 6 carbon atoms (“C1-6 alkyl”, also referred to herein as “lower alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 5 carbon atoms (“C1-5 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 4 carbon atoms (“C1-4 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 3 carbon atoms (“C1-3 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 2 carbon atoms (“C1-2 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 carbon atom (“C1 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C2-6 alkyl”). Examples of C1-6 alkyl groups include methyl (C1), ethyl (C2), n-propyl (C3), isopropyl (C3), n-butyl (C4), tert-butyl (C4), sec-butyl (C4), iso-butyl (C4), n-pentyl (C5), 3-pentanyl (C5), amyl (C5), neopentyl (C5), 3-methyl-2-butanyl (C5), tertiary amyl (C5), and n-hexyl (C6). Additional examples of alkyl groups include n-heptyl (C7), n-octyl (C8) and the like. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an alkyl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted alkyl”) or substituted (a “substituted alkyl”) with one or more substituents; e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent. In certain embodiments, the alkyl group is unsubstituted C1-10 alkyl (e.g., —CH3). In certain embodiments, the alkyl group is substituted C1-10 alkyl. Common alkyl abbreviations include Me (—CH3), Et (—CH2CH3), iPr (—CH(CH3)2), nPr (—CH2CH2CH3), n-Bu (—CH2CH2CH2CH3), or i-Bu (—CH2CH(CH3)2).
  • “Alkenyl” refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms, one or more carbon-carbon double bonds, and no triple bonds (“C2-20 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 10 carbon atoms (“C2-10 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms (“C2-8 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C2-6 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms (“C2-5 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms (“C2-4 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms (“C2-3 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 carbon atoms (“C2 alkenyl”). The one or more carbon-carbon double bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butenyl) or terminal (such as in 1-butenyl). Examples of C2-4 alkenyl groups include ethenyl (C2), 1-propenyl (C3), 2-propenyl (C3), 1-butenyl (C4), 2-butenyl (C4), butadienyl (C4), and the like. Examples of C2-6 alkenyl groups include the aforementioned C2-4 alkenyl groups as well as pentenyl (C5), pentadienyl (C5), hexenyl (C6), and the like. Additional examples of alkenyl include heptenyl (C7), octenyl (C8), octatrienyl (C8), and the like. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an alkenyl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted alkenyl”) or substituted (a “substituted alkenyl”) with one or more substituents e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent. In certain embodiments, the alkenyl group is unsubstituted C2-10 alkenyl. In certain embodiments, the alkenyl group is substituted C2-10 alkenyl.
  • “Alkynyl” refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms, one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds, and optionally one or more double bonds (“C2-20 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 10 carbon atoms (“C2-10 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms (“C2-8 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C2-6 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms (“C2-5 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms (“C2-4 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms (“C2-3 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 carbon atoms (“C2 alkynyl”). The one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butynyl) or terminal (such as in 1-butynyl). Examples of C2-4 alkynyl groups include, without limitation, ethynyl (C2), 1-propynyl (C3), 2-propynyl (C3), 1-butynyl (C4), 2-butynyl (C4), and the like. Examples of C2-6 alkenyl groups include the aforementioned C2-4 alkynyl groups as well as pentynyl (C5), hexynyl (C6), and the like. Additional examples of alkynyl include heptynyl (C7), octynyl (C8), and the like. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an alkynyl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted alkynyl”) or substituted (a “substituted alkynyl”) with one or more substituents; e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent. In certain embodiments, the alkynyl group is unsubstituted C2-10 alkynyl. In certain embodiments, the alkynyl group is substituted C2-10 alkynyl.
  • “Aryl” refers to a radical of a monocyclic or polycyclic (e.g., bicyclic or tricyclic) 4n+2 aromatic ring system (e.g., having 6, 10, or 14π electrons shared in a cyclic array) having 6-14 ring carbon atoms and zero heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system (“C6-14 aryl”). In some embodiments, an aryl group has six ring carbon atoms (“C6 aryl”; e.g., phenyl). In some embodiments, an aryl group has ten ring carbon atoms (“C10 aryl”; e.g., naphthyl such as 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl). In some embodiments, an aryl group has fourteen ring carbon atoms (“C14 aryl”; e.g., anthracyl). “Aryl” also includes ring systems wherein the aryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl groups wherein the radical or point of attachment is on the aryl ring, and in such instances, the number of carbon atoms continue to designate the number of carbon atoms in the aryl ring system. Aryl groups include, but are not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, and tetrahydronaphthyl. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an aryl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted aryl”) or substituted (a “substituted aryl”) with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the aryl group is unsubstituted C6-14 aryl. In certain embodiments, the aryl group is substituted C6-14 aryl.
  • In certain embodiments, an aryl group substituted with one or more of groups selected from halo, C1-C8 alkyl, C1-C8 haloalkyl, cyano, hydroxy, C1-C8 alkoxy, and amino.
  • Examples of representative substituted aryls include the following
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00022
  • wherein one of R56 and R57 may be hydrogen and at least one of R56 and R57 is each independently selected from C1-C8 alkyl, C1-C8 haloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, alkanoyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, heteroaryloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, NR58COR59, NR58SOR59 NR58SO2R59, COOalkyl, COOaryl, CONR58R59, CONR58OR59, NR58R59, SO2NR58R59, S-alkyl, SOalkyl, SO2alkyl, Saryl, SOaryl, SO2aryl; or R56 and R57 may be joined to form a cyclic ring (saturated or unsaturated) from 5 to 8 atoms, optionally containing one or more heteroatoms selected from the group N, O, or S. R60 and R61 are independently hydrogen, C1-C8 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, substituted C6-C10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  • Other representative aryl groups having a fused heterocyclyl group include the following:
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00023
  • wherein each W is selected from C(R66)2, NR66, O, and S; and each Y is selected from carbonyl, NR66, O and S; and R66 is independently hydrogen, C1-C8 alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, and 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  • “Halo” or “halogen,” independently or as part of another substituent, mean, unless otherwise stated, a fluorine (F), chlorine (Cl), bromine (Br), or iodine (I) atom. The term “halide” by itself or as part of another substituent, refers to a fluoride, chloride, bromide, or iodide atom. In certain embodiments, the halo group is either fluorine or chlorine.
  • “Haloalkyl” and “haloalkoxy” can include alkyl and alkoxy structures that are substituted with one or more halo groups or with combinations thereof. For example, the terms “fluoroalkyl” and “fluoroalkoxy” include haloalkyl and haloalkoxy groups, respectively, in which the halo is fluorine.
  • “Heteroaryl” refers to a radical of a 5-10 membered monocyclic or bicyclic 4n+2 aromatic ring system (e.g., having 6 or 10π electrons shared in a cyclic array) having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur (“5-10 membered heteroaryl”). In heteroaryl groups that contain one or more nitrogen atoms, the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits. Heteroaryl bicyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings. “Heteroaryl” includes ring systems wherein the heteroaryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl groups wherein the point of attachment is on the heteroaryl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members continue to designate the number of ring members in the heteroaryl ring system. “Heteroaryl” also includes ring systems wherein the heteroaryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the aryl or heteroaryl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members designates the number of ring members in the fused (aryl/heteroaryl) ring system. Bicyclic heteroaryl groups wherein one ring does not contain a heteroatom (e.g., indolyl, quinolinyl, carbazolyl, and the like) the point of attachment can be on either ring, i.e., either the ring bearing a heteroatom (e.g., 2-indolyl) or the ring that does not contain a heteroatom (e.g., 5-indolyl).
  • In some embodiments, a heteroaryl group is a 5-10 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-10 membered heteroaryl”). In some embodiments, a heteroaryl group is a 5-8 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-8 membered heteroaryl”). In some embodiments, a heteroaryl group is a 5-6 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-6 membered heteroaryl”). In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1 ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a heteroaryl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted heteroaryl”) or substituted (a “substituted heteroaryl”) with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the heteroaryl group is unsubstituted 5-14 membered heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, the heteroaryl group is substituted 5-14 membered heteroaryl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, pyrrolyl, furanyl and thiophenyl. Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, and isothiazolyl. Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing three heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolyl, oxadiazolyl, and thiadiazolyl. Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing four heteroatoms include, without limitation, tetrazolyl. Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, pyridinyl. Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, and pyrazinyl. Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing three or four heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinyl and tetrazinyl, respectively. Exemplary 7-membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azepinyl, oxepinyl, and thiepinyl. Exemplary 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, indolyl, isoindolyl, indazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzofuranyl, benzoisofuranyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, benzthiadiazolyl, indolizinyl, and purinyl. Exemplary 6,6-bicyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, phthalazinyl, and quinazolinyl.
  • Examples of representative heteroaryls include the following formulae:
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00024
  • wherein each Y is selected from carbonyl, N, NR65, O, and S; and R65 is independently hydrogen, C1-C8 alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, and 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  • “Carbocyclyl” or “carbocyclic” refers to a radical of a non-aromatic cyclic hydrocarbon group having from 3 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C3-10 carbocyclyl”) and zero heteroatoms in the non-aromatic ring system. In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 8 ring carbon atoms (“C3-8 carbocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C3-6 carbocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C3-6 carbocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 5 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C5-10 carbocyclyl”). Exemplary C3-6 carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, cyclopropyl (C3), cyclopropenyl (C3), cyclobutyl (C4), cyclobutenyl (C4), cyclopentyl (C5), cyclopentenyl (C5), cyclohexyl (C6), cyclohexenyl (C6), cyclohexadienyl (C6), and the like. Exemplary C3-8 carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, the aforementioned C3-6 carbocyclyl groups as well as cycloheptyl (C7), cycloheptenyl (C7), cycloheptadienyl (C7), cycloheptatrienyl (C7), cyclooctyl (C8), cyclooctenyl (C8), bicyclo[2.2.1]heptanyl (C7), bicyclo[2.2.2]octanyl (C8), and the like. Exemplary C3-10 carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, the aforementioned C3-8 carbocyclyl groups as well as cyclononyl (C9), cyclononenyl (C9), cyclodecyl (C10), cyclodecenyl (C10), octahydro-1H-indenyl (C9), decahydronaphthalenyl (C10), spiro[4.5]decanyl (C10), and the like. As the foregoing examples illustrate, in certain embodiments, the carbocyclyl group is either monocyclic (“monocyclic carbocyclyl”) or contain a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system (“bicyclic carbocyclyl”) and can be saturated or can be partially unsaturated. “Carbocyclyl” also includes ring systems wherein the carbocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl or heteroaryl groups wherein the point of attachment is on the carbocyclyl ring, and in such instances, the number of carbons continue to designate the number of carbons in the carbocyclic ring system. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a carbocyclyl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted carbocyclyl”) or substituted (a “substituted carbocyclyl”) with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the carbocyclyl group is unsubstituted C3-10 carbocyclyl. In certain embodiments, the carbocyclyl group is a substituted C3-10 carbocyclyl.
  • In some embodiments, “carbocyclyl” is a monocyclic, saturated carbocyclyl group having from 3 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C3-10 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 8 ring carbon atoms (“C3-8 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C3-6 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 5 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C5-6 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 5 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C5-10 cycloalkyl”). Examples of C5-6 cycloalkyl groups include cyclopentyl (C5) and cyclohexyl (C5). Examples of C3-6 cycloalkyl groups include the aforementioned C5-6 cycloalkyl groups as well as cyclopropyl (C3) and cyclobutyl (C4). Examples of C3-8 cycloalkyl groups include the aforementioned C3-6 cycloalkyl groups as well as cycloheptyl (C7) and cyclooctyl (C8). Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a cycloalkyl group is independently unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted cycloalkyl”) or substituted (a “substituted cycloalkyl”) with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the cycloalkyl group is unsubstituted C3-10 cycloalkyl. In certain embodiments, the cycloalkyl group is substituted C3-10 cycloalkyl.
  • “Heterocyclyl” or “heterocyclic” refers to a radical of a 3- to 10-membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1 to 4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, boron, phosphorus, and silicon (“3-10 membered heterocyclyl”). In heterocyclyl groups that contain one or more nitrogen atoms, the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits. A heterocyclyl group can either be monocyclic (“monocyclic heterocyclyl”) or a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system (“bicyclic heterocyclyl”), and can be saturated or can be partially unsaturated. Heterocyclyl bicyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings. “Heterocyclyl” also includes ring systems wherein the heterocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl ring, or ring systems wherein the heterocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl or heteroaryl groups, wherein the point of attachment is on the heterocyclyl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members continue to designate the number of ring members in the heterocyclyl ring system. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of heterocyclyl is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted heterocyclyl”) or substituted (a “substituted heterocyclyl”) with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the heterocyclyl group is unsubstituted 3-10 membered heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, the heterocyclyl group is substituted 3-10 membered heterocyclyl.
  • In some embodiments, a heterocyclyl group is a 5-10 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, boron, phosphorus, and silicon (“5-10 membered heterocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a heterocyclyl group is a 5-8 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-8 membered heterocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a heterocyclyl group is a 5-6 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-6 membered heterocyclyl”). In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has one ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • Exemplary 3-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azirdinyl, oxiranyl, thiorenyl. Exemplary 4-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azetidinyl, oxetanyl and thietanyl. Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, dihydrothiophenyl, pyrrolidinyl, dihydropyrrolyl and pyrrolyl-2,5-dione. Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, dioxolanyl, oxasulfuranyl, disulfuranyl, and oxazolidin-2-one. Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing three heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolinyl, oxadiazolinyl, and thiadiazolinyl. Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyridinyl, and thianyl. Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, dithianyl, dioxanyl. Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinanyl. Exemplary 7-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azepanyl, oxepanyl and thiepanyl. Exemplary 8-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azocanyl, oxecanyl and thiocanyl. Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups fused to a C6 aryl ring (also referred to herein as a 5,6-bicyclic heterocyclic ring) include, without limitation, indolinyl, isoindolinyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, dihydrobenzothienyl, benzoxazolinonyl, and the like. Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups fused to an aryl ring (also referred to herein as a 6,6-bicyclic heterocyclic ring) include, without limitation, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, and the like.
  • Particular examples of heterocyclyl groups are shown in the following illustrative examples:
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00025
  • wherein each W is selected from CR67, C(R67)2, NR67, O, and S; and each Y is selected from NR67, O, and S; and R67 is independently hydrogen, C1-C8 alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, and 5-10-membered heteroaryl. These heterocyclyl rings may be optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl (e.g., amido), aminocarbonylamino, aminosulfonyl, sulfonylamino, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, halogen, hydroxy, keto, nitro, thiol, —S-alkyl, —S-aryl, —S(O)-alkyl, —S(O)-aryl, —S(O)2-alkyl, and —S(O)2-aryl. Substituting groups include carbonyl or thiocarbonyl which provide, for example, lactam and urea derivatives.
  • “Acyl” refers to a radical —C(O)R20, where R20 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, as defined herein. “Alkanoyl” is an acyl group wherein R20 is a group other than hydrogen. Representative acyl groups include, but are not limited to, formyl (—CHO), acetyl (—C(═O)CH3), cyclohexylcarbonyl, cyclohexylmethylcarbonyl, benzoyl (—C(═O)Ph), benzylcarbonyl (—C(═O)CH2Ph), —C(O)—C1-C8 alkyl, —C(O)—(CH2)t(C6-C10 aryl), —C(O)—(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), —C(O)—(CH2)t(C3-C10 cycloalkyl), and —C(O)—(CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4. In certain embodiments, R21 is C1-C8 alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; or C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
  • “Acylamino” refers to a radical —NR22C(O)R23, where each instance of R22 and R23 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, as defined herein, or R22 is an amino protecting group. Exemplary “acylamino” groups include, but are not limited to, formylamino, acetylamino, cyclohexylcarbonylamino, cyclohexylmethyl-carbonylamino, benzoylamino and benzylcarbonylamino. Particular exemplary “acylamino” groups are —NR24C(O)—C1-C8 alkyl, —NR24C(O)—(CH2)t(C6-C10 aryl), —NR24C(O)—(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), —NR24C(O)—(CH2)t(C3-C10 cycloalkyl), and —NR24C(O)—(CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4, and each R24 independently represents hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl. In certain embodiments, R25 is H, C1-C8 alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy; and R26 is H, C1-C8 alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10-membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10-membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy; provided at least one of R25 and R26 is other than H.
  • “Acyloxy” refers to a radical —OC(O)R27, where R27 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, as defined herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, formyl, acetyl, cyclohexylcarbonyl, cyclohexylmethylcarbonyl, benzoyl, and benzylcarbonyl. In certain embodiments, R28 is C1-C8 alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10-membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10-membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
  • “Alkoxy” refers to the group —OR29 where R29 is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl. Particular alkoxy groups are methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, and 1,2-dimethylbutoxy. Particular alkoxy groups are lower alkoxy, i.e., with between 1 and 6 carbon atoms. Further particular alkoxy groups have between 1 and 4 carbon atoms.
  • In certain embodiments, R29 is a group that has 1 or more substituents, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, in particular 1 substituent, selected from the group consisting of amino, substituted amino, C6-C10 aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, cyano, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, halogen, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, hydroxy, nitro, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thiol, alkyl-S(O)—, aryl-S(O)—, alkyl-S(O)2— and aryl-S(O)2—. Exemplary “substituted alkoxy” groups include, but are not limited to, —O—(CH2)t(C6-C10 aryl), —O—(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), —O—(CH2)t(C3-C10 cycloalkyl), and —O—(CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4 and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy. Particular exemplary ‘substituted alkoxy’ groups are —OCF3, —OCH2CF3, —OCH2Ph, —OCH2-cyclopropyl, —OCH2CH2OH, and —OCH2CH2NMe2.
  • “Amino” refers to the radical —NH2.
  • “Substituted amino” refers to an amino group of the formula —N(R38)2 wherein R38 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or an amino protecting group, wherein at least one of R38 is not a hydrogen. In certain embodiments, each R38 is independently selected from hydrogen, C1-C8 alkyl, C3-C8 alkenyl, C3-C8 alkynyl, C6-C10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, or C3-C10 cycloalkyl; or C1-C8 alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C3-C8 alkenyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C3-C8 alkynyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy, or —(CH2)t(C6-C10 aryl), —(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), —(CH2)t(C3-C10 cycloalkyl), or —(CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer between 0 and 8, each of which is substituted by unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy; or both R38 groups are joined to form an alkylene group.
  • Exemplary “substituted amino” groups include, but are not limited to, —NR39—C1-C8 alkyl, —NR39—(CH2)t(C6-C10 aryl), —NR39—(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), —NR39—(CH2)t(C3-C10 cycloalkyl), and —NR39—(CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4, for instance 1 or 2, each R39 independently represents hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and any alkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy; and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy. For the avoidance of doubt the term ‘substituted amino’ includes the groups alkylamino, substituted alkylamino, alkylarylamino, substituted alkylarylamino, arylamino, substituted arylamino, dialkylamino, and substituted dialkylamino as defined below. Substituted amino encompasses both monosubstituted amino and disubstituted amino groups.
  • “Azido” refers to the radical —N3.
  • “Carbamoyl” or “amido” refers to the radical —C(O)NH2.
  • “Substituted carbamoyl” or “substituted amido” refers to the radical —C(O)N(R62)2 wherein each R62 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or an amino protecting group, wherein at least one of R62 is not a hydrogen. In certain embodiments, R62 is selected from H, C1-C8 alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, and 5-10 membered heteroaryl; or C1-C8 alkyl substituted with halo or hydroxy; or C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, or 5-10 membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted by unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy; provided that at least one R62 is other than H.
  • “Carboxy” refers to the radical —C(O)OH.
  • “Cyano” refers to the radical —CN.
  • “Hydroxy” refers to the radical —OH.
  • “Nitro” refers to the radical —NO2.
  • “Ethenyl” refers to substituted or unsubstituted —(C═C)—. “Ethylene” refers to substituted or unsubstituted —(C—C)—. “Ethynyl” refers to —(C≡C)—.
  • “Nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl” group means a 4- to 7-membered non-aromatic cyclic group containing at least one nitrogen atom, for example, but without limitation, morpholine, piperidine (e.g. 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl and 4-piperidinyl), pyrrolidine (e.g. 2-pyrrolidinyl and 3-pyrrolidinyl), azetidine, pyrrolidone, imidazoline, imidazolidinone, 2-pyrazoline, pyrazolidine, piperazine, and N-alkyl piperazines such as N-methyl piperazine. Particular examples include azetidine, piperidone and piperazone.
  • Alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl groups, as defined herein, are optionally substituted (e.g., “substituted” or “unsubstituted” alkyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” alkenyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” alkynyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” carbocyclyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” heterocyclyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” aryl or “substituted” or “unsubstituted” heteroaryl group). In general, the term “substituted”, whether preceded by the term “optionally” or not, means that at least one hydrogen present on a group (e.g., a carbon or nitrogen atom) is replaced with a permissible substituent, e.g., a substituent which upon substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., a compound which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, or other reaction. Unless otherwise indicated, a “substituted” group has a substituent at one or more substitutable positions of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure is substituted, the substituent is either the same or different at each position. The term “substituted” is contemplated to include substitution with all permissible substituents of organic compounds, any of the substituents described herein that results in the formation of a stable compound. The present invention contemplates any and all such combinations in order to arrive at a stable compound. For purposes of this invention, heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any suitable substituent as described herein which satisfy the valencies of the heteroatoms and results in the formation of a stable moiety.
  • Exemplary carbon atom substituents include, but are not limited to, halogen, —CN, —NO2, —N3, —SO2H, —SO3H, —OH, —ORaa, —ON(Rbb)2, —N(Rbb)2, —N(Rbb)3 +X, —N(ORcc)Rbb, —SH, —SRaa, —SSRcc, —C(═O)Raa, —CO2H, —CHO, —C(ORcc)2, —CO2Raa, —OC(═O)Raa, —OCO2Raa, —C(═O)N(Rbb)2, —OC(═O)N(Rbb)2, —NRbbC(═O)Raa, —NRbbCO2Raa, —NRbbC(═O)N(Rbb)2, —C(═NRbb)Raa, —C(═NRbb)ORaa, —OC(═NRbb)Raa, —OC(═NRbb)ORaa, —C(═NRbb)N(Rbb)2, —OC(═NRbb)N(Rbb)2, —NRbbC(═NRbb)N(Rbb)2, —C(═O)NRbbSO2Raa, —NRbbSO2Raa, —SO2N(Rbb)2, —SO2Raa, —SO2ORaa, —OSO2Raa, —S(═O)Raa, —OS(═O)Raa, —Si(Raa)3, —OSi(Raa)3—C(═S)N(Rbb)2, —C(═O)SRaa, —C(═S)SRaa, —SC(═S)SRaa, —SC(═O)SRaa, —OC(═O)SRaa, —SC(═O)ORaa, —SC(═O)Raa, —P(═O)2Raa, —OP(═O)2Raa, —P(═O)(Raa)2, —OP(═O)(Raa)2, —OP(═O)(ORcc)2, —P(═O)2N(Rbb)2, —OP(═O)2N(Rbb)2, —P(═O)(NRbb)2, —OP(═O)(NRbb)2, —NRbbP(═O)(ORcc)2, —NRbbP(═O)(NRbb)2, —P(Rcc)2, —P(Rcc)3, —OP(Rcc)2, —OP(Rcc)3, —B(Raa)2, —B(ORcc)2, —BRaa(ORcc), C1-10 alkyl, C1-10 perhaloalkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, C2-10 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd groups;
  • each instance of Raa is, independently, selected from C1-10 alkyl, C1-10 perhaloalkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, C2-10 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two Raa groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd groups;
  • each instance of Rbb is, independently, selected from hydrogen, —OH, —ORaa, —N(Rcc)2, —CN, —C(═O)Raa, —C(═O)N(Rcc)2, —CO2Raa, —SO2Raa, —C(═NRcc)ORaa, —C(═NRcc)N(Rcc)2, —SO2N(Rcc)2, —SO2Rcc, —SO2ORcc, —SORaa, —C(═S)N(Rcc)2, —C(═O)SRcc, —C(═S)SRcc, —P(═O)2Raa, —P(═O)(Raa)2, —P(═O)2N(Rcc)2, —P(═O)(NRcc)2, C1-10 alkyl, C1-10 perhaloalkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, C2-10 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two Rbb groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd groups;
  • each instance of Rcc is, independently, selected from hydrogen, C1-10 alkyl, C1-10 perhaloalkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, C2-10 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two Rcc groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd groups;
  • each instance of Rdd is, independently, selected from halogen, —CN, —NO2, —N3, —SO2H, —SO3H, —OH, —ORee, —ON(Rff)2, —N(Rff)2, —N(Rff)3 +X, —N(ORee)Rff, —SH, —SRee, —SSRee, —C(═O)Ree, —CO2H, —CO2Ree, —OC(═O)Ree, —OCO2Ree, —C(═O)N(Rff)2, —OC(═O)N(Rff)2, —NRffC(═O)Ree, —NRffCO2Ree, —NRffC(═O)N(Rff)2, —C(═NRff)ORee, —OC(═NRff)Ree, —OC(═NRff)ORee, —C(═NRff)N(Rff)2, —OC(═NRff)N(Rff)2, —NRffC(═NRff)N(Rff)2, —NRffSO2Ree, —SO2N(Rff)2, —SO2Ree, —SO2ORee, —OSO2Ree, —S(═O)Ree, —Si(Ree)3, —OSi(Ree)3, —C(═S)N(Rff)2, —C(═O)SRee, —C(═S)SRee, —SC(═S)SRee, —P(═O)2Ree, —P(═O)(Ree)2, —OP(═O)(Ree)2, —OP(═O)(ORee)2, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 perhaloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rgg groups;
  • each instance of Ree is, independently, selected from C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 perhaloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, C6-10 aryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, and 3-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rgg groups;
  • each instance of Rff is, independently, selected from hydrogen, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 perhaloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-10 aryl and 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or two Rff groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rgg groups; and
  • each instance of Rgg is, independently, halogen, —CN, —NO2, —N3, —SO2H, —SO3H, —OH, —OC1-6 alkyl, —ON(C1-6 alkyl)2, —N(C1-6 alkyl)2, —N(C1-6 alkyl)3 +X, —NH(C1-6 alkyl)2 +X, —NH2(C1-6 alkyl)+X, —NH3 +X, —N(OC1-6 alkyl)(C1-6 alkyl), —N(OH)(C1-6 alkyl), —NH(OH), —SH, —SC1-6 alkyl, —SS(C1-6 alkyl), —C(═O)(C1-6 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-6 alkyl), —OC(═O)(C1-6 alkyl), —OCO2(C1-6 alkyl), —C(═O)NH2, —C(═O)N(C1-6 alkyl)2, —OC(═O)NH(C1-6 alkyl), —NHC(═O)(C1-6 alkyl), —N(C1-6 alkyl)C(═O)(C1-6 alkyl), —NHCO2(C1-6 alkyl), —NHC(═O)N(C1-6 alkyl)2, —NHC(═O)NH(C1-6 alkyl), —NHC(═O)NH2, —C(═NH)O(C1-6 alkyl), —OC(═NH)(C1-6 alkyl), —OC(═NH)OC1-6 alkyl, —C(═NH)N(C1-6 alkyl)2, —C(═NH)NH(C1-6 alkyl), —C(═NH)NH2, —OC(═NH)N(C1-6 alkyl)2, —OC(NH)NH(C1-6 alkyl), —OC(NH)NH2, —NHC(NH)N(C1-6 alkyl)2, —NHC(═NH)NH2, —NHSO2(C1-6 alkyl), —SO2N(C1-6 alkyl)2, —SO2NH(C1-6 alkyl), —SO2NH2, —SO2C1-6 alkyl, —SO2OC1-6 alkyl, —OSO2C1-6 alkyl, —SOC1-6 alkyl, —Si(C1-6 alkyl)3, —OSi(C1-6 alkyl)3-C(═S)N(C1-6 alkyl)2, C(═S)NH(C1-6 alkyl), C(═S)NH2, —C(═O)S(C1-6 alkyl), —C(═S)SC1-6 alkyl, —SC(═S)SC1-6 alkyl, —P(═O)2(C1-6 alkyl), —P(═O)(C1-6 alkyl)2, —OP(═O)(C1-6 alkyl)2, —OP(═O)(OC1-6 alkyl)2, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 perhaloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, C6-10 aryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl; wherein X is a counterion.
  • A “counterion” or “anionic counterion” is a negatively charged group associated with a cationic quaternary amino group in order to maintain electronic neutrality. Exemplary counterions include halide ions (e.g., F, Cl, Br, I), NO3 , ClO4 , OH, H2PO4 , HSO4 , sulfonate ions (e.g., methansulfonate, trifluoromethanesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, 10-camphor sulfonate, naphthalene-2-sulfonate, naphthalene-1-sulfonic acid-5-sulfonate, ethan-1-sulfonic acid-2-sulfonate, and the like), and carboxylate ions (e.g., acetate, ethanoate, propanoate, benzoate, glycerate, lactate, tartrate, glycolate, and the like).
  • Nitrogen atoms can be substituted or unsubstituted as valency permits, and include primary, secondary, tertiary, and quarternary nitrogen atoms. Exemplary nitrogen atom substitutents include, but are not limited to, hydrogen, —OH, —ORaa, —N(Rcc)2, —CN, —C(═O)Raa, —C(═O)N(Rcc)2, —CO2Raa, —SO2Raa, —C(═NRbb)Raa, —C(═NRcc)ORaa, —C(═NRcc)N(Rcc)2, —SO2N(Rcc)2, —SO2Rcc, —SO2ORcc, —SORaa, —C(═S)N(Rcc)2, —C(═O)SRcc, —C(═S)SRcc, —P(═O)2Raa, —P(═O)(Raa)2, —P(═O)2N(Rcc)2, —P(═O)(NRcc)2, C1-10 alkyl, C1-10 perhaloalkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, C2-10 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-14 aryl, and 5-14-membered heteroaryl, or two Rcc groups attached to a nitrogen atom are joined to form a 3-14-membered heterocyclyl or 5-14-membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd groups, and wherein Raa, Rbb, Rcc and Rdd are as defined above.
  • In certain embodiments, the substituent present on a nitrogen atom is an amino protecting group (also referred to herein as a nitrogen protecting group). Amino protecting groups include, but are not limited to, —OH, —ORaa, —N(Rcc)2, —C(═O)Raa, —C(═O)ORaa, —C(═O)N(Rcc)2, —S(═O)2Raa, —C(═NRcc)Raa, —C(═NRcc)ORaa, —C(═NRcc)N(Rcc)2, —SO2N(Rcc)2, —SO2Rcc, —SO2ORcc, —SORaa, —C(═S)N(Rcc)2, —C(═O)SRcc, —C(═S)SRcc, C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, C2-10 alkynyl, C3-10 carbocyclyl, 3-14-membered heterocyclyl, C6-14 aryl, and 5-14-membered heteroaryl groups, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd groups, and wherein Raa, Rbb, Rcc and Rdd are as defined herein. Amino protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference.
  • Exemplary amino protecting groups include, but are not limited to amide groups (e.g., —C(═O)Raa), which include, but are not limited to, formamide and acetamide; carbamate groups (e.g., —C(═O)ORaa), which include, but are not limited to, 9-fluorenylmethyl carbamate (Fmoc), t-butyl carbamate (BOC), and benzyl carbamate (Cbz); sulfonamide groups (e.g., —S(═O)2Raa), which include, but are not limited to, p-toluenesulfonamide (Ts), methanesulfonamide (Ms), and N-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methylamine (SEM).
  • In certain embodiments, the substituent present on an oxygen atom is an oxygen protecting group (also referred to as a hydroxyl protecting group). Oxygen protecting groups include, but are not limited to, —Raa, —N(Rbb)2, —C(═O)SRaa, —C(═O)Raa, —CO2Raa, —C(═O)N(Rbb)2, —C(═NRbb)Raa, —C(═NRbb)ORaa, —C(═NRbb)N(Rbb)2, —S(═O)Raa, —SO2Raa, —Si(Raa)3, —P(Rcc)2, —P(Rcc)3, —P(═O)2Raa, —P(═O)(Raa)2, —P(═O)(ORcc)2, —P(═O)2N(Rbb)2, and —P(═O)(NRbb)2, wherein Raa, Rbb, and Rcc are as defined herein. Oxygen protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference.
  • Exemplary oxygen protecting groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, methoxylmethyl (MOM), 2-methoxyethoxymethyl (MEM), benzyl (Bn), triisopropylsilyl (TIPS), t-butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS), t-butylmethoxyphenylsilyl (TBMPS), methanesulfonate (mesylate), and tosylate (Ts).
  • In certain embodiments, the substituent present on an sulfur atom is an sulfur protecting group (also referred to as a thiol protecting group). Sulfur protecting groups include, but are not limited to, —Raa, —N(Rbb)2, —C(═O)SRaa, —C(═O)Raa, —CO2Raa, —C(═O)N(Rbb)2, —C(═NRbb)Raa, —C(═NRbb)ORaa, —C(═NRbb)N(Rbb)2, —S(═O)Raa, —SO2Raa, —Si(Raa)3, —P(Rcc)2, —P(Rcc)3, —P(═O)2Raa, —P(═O)(Raa)2, —P(═O)(ORcc)2, —P(═O)2N(Rbb)2, and —P(═O)(NRbb)2, wherein Raa, Rbb, and Rcc are as defined herein. Sulfur protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference.
  • These and other exemplary substituents are described in more detail in the Detailed Description, Examples, and Claims. The invention is not intended to be limited in any manner by the above exemplary listing of substituents.
  • Other Definitions
  • As used herein, the term “modulation” refers to the inhibition or potentiation of GABA receptor function. A “modulator” (e.g., a modulator compound) may be, for example, an agonist, partial agonist, antagonist, or partial antagonist of the GABA receptor.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable” means approved or approvable by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or the corresponding agency in countries other than the United States, or that is listed in the U.S. Pharmacopoeia or other generally recognized pharmacopoeia for use in animals, and more particularly, in humans.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to a salt of a compound of the invention that is pharmaceutically acceptable and that possesses the desired pharmacological activity of the parent compound. In particular, such salts are non-toxic may be inorganic or organic acid addition salts and base addition salts. Specifically, such salts include: (1) acid addition salts, formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like; or formed with organic acids such as acetic acid, propionic acid, hexanoic acid, cyclopentanepropionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, lactic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, malic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, 3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl) benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, 1,2-ethane-disulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, 4-chlorobenzenesulfonic acid, 2-naphthalenesulfonic acid, 4-toluenesulfonic acid, camphorsulfonic acid, 4-methylbicyclo[2.2.2]-oct-2-ene-1-carboxylic acid, glucoheptonic acid, 3-phenylpropionic acid, trimethylacetic acid, tertiary butylacetic acid, lauryl sulfuric acid, gluconic acid, glutamic acid, hydroxynaphthoic acid, salicylic acid, stearic acid, muconic acid, and the like; or (2) salts formed when an acidic proton present in the parent compound either is replaced by a metal ion, e.g., an alkali metal ion, an alkaline earth ion, or an aluminum ion; or coordinates with an organic base such as ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, N-methylglucamine and the like. Salts further include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like; and when the compound contains a basic functionality, salts of non-toxic organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate and the like. The term “pharmaceutically acceptable cation” refers to an acceptable cationic counter-ion of an acidic functional group. Such cations are exemplified by sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium cations, and the like. See, e.g., Berge, et al., J. Pharm. Sci. (1977) 66(1): 1-79.
  • “Solvate” refers to forms of the compound that are associated with a solvent or water (also referred to as “hydrate”), usually by a solvolysis reaction. This physical association includes hydrogen bonding. Conventional solvents include water, ethanol, acetic acid, and the like. The compounds of the invention may be prepared e.g. in crystalline form and may be solvated or hydrated. Suitable solvates include pharmaceutically acceptable solvates, such as hydrates, and further include both stoichiometric solvates and non-stoichiometric solvates. In certain instances the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid. “Solvate” encompasses both solution-phase and isolable solvates. Representative solvates include hydrates, ethanolates and methanolates.
  • As used herein, the term “isotopic variant” refers to a compound that contains unnatural proportions of isotopes at one or more of the atoms that constitute such compound. For example, an “isotopic variant” of a compound can contain one or more non-radioactive isotopes, such as for example, deuterium (2H or D), carbon-13 (13C), nitrogen-15 (15N), or the like. It will be understood that, in a compound where such isotopic substitution is made, the following atoms, where present, may vary, so that for example, any hydrogen may be 2H/D, any carbon may be 13C, or any nitrogen may be 15N, and that the presence and placement of such atoms may be determined within the skill of the art. Likewise, the invention may include the preparation of isotopic variants with radioisotopes, in the instance for example, where the resulting compounds may be used for drug and/or substrate tissue distribution studies. The radioactive isotopes tritium, i.e., 3H, and carbon-14, i.e., 14C, are particularly useful for this purpose in view of their ease of incorporation and ready means of detection. Further, compounds may be prepared that are substituted with positron emitting isotopes, such as 11C, 18F, 15O, and 13N, and would be useful in Positron Emission Topography (PET) studies for examining substrate receptor occupancy. All isotopic variants of the compounds provided herein, radioactive or not, are intended to be encompassed within the scope of the invention.
  • “Stereoisomers”: It is also to be understood that compounds that have the same molecular formula but differ in the nature or sequence of bonding of their atoms or the arrangement of their atoms in space are termed “isomers.” Isomers that differ in the arrangement of their atoms in space are termed “stereoisomers.” Stereoisomers that are not mirror images of one another are termed “diastereomers” and those that are non-superimposable mirror images of each other are termed “enantiomers.” When a compound has an asymmetric center, for example, it is bonded to four different groups, a pair of enantiomers is possible. An enantiomer can be characterized by the absolute configuration of its asymmetric center and is described by the R- and S-sequencing rules of Cahn and Prelog, or by the manner in which the molecule rotates the plane of polarized light and designated as dextrorotatory or levorotatory (i.e., as (+) or (−)-isomers respectively). A chiral compound can exist as either individual enantiomer or as a mixture thereof. A mixture containing equal proportions of the enantiomers is called a “racemic mixture”.
  • “Tautomers” refer to compounds that are interchangeable forms of a particular compound structure, and that vary in the displacement of hydrogen atoms and electrons. Thus, two structures may be in equilibrium through the movement of π electrons and an atom (usually H). For example, enols and ketones are tautomers because they are rapidly interconverted by treatment with either acid or base. Another example of tautomerism is the aci- and nitro-forms of phenylnitromethane, that are likewise formed by treatment with acid or base. Tautomeric forms may be relevant to the attainment of the optimal chemical reactivity and biological activity of a compound of interest.
  • A “subject” to which administration is contemplated includes, but is not limited to, humans (i.e., a male or female of any age group, e.g., a pediatric subject (e.g, infant, child, adolescent) or adult subject (e.g., young adult, middle-aged adult or senior adult)) and/or a non-human animal, e.g., a mammal such as primates (e.g., cynomolgus monkeys, rhesus monkeys), cattle, pigs, horses, sheep, goats, rodents, cats, and/or dogs. In certain embodiments, the subject is a human. In certain embodiments, the subject is a non-human animal. The terms “human,” “patient,” and “subject” are used interchangeably herein.
  • Disease, disorder, and condition are used interchangeably herein.
  • As used herein, and unless otherwise specified, the terms “treat,” “treating” and “treatment” contemplate an action that occurs while a subject is suffering from the specified disease, disorder or condition, which reduces the severity of the disease, disorder or condition, or retards or slows the progression of the disease, disorder or condition (“therapeutic treatment”), and also contemplates an action that occurs before a subject begins to suffer from the specified disease, disorder or condition (“prophylactic treatment”).
  • In general, the “effective amount” of a compound refers to an amount sufficient to elicit the desired biological response, e.g., to treat a CNS-related disorder, is sufficient to induce anesthesia or sedation. As will be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in this art, the effective amount of a compound of the invention may vary depending on such factors as the desired biological endpoint, the pharmacokinetics of the compound, the disease being treated, the mode of administration, and the age, weight, health, and condition of the subject. An effective amount encompasses therapeutic and prophylactic treatment.
  • As used herein, and unless otherwise specified, a “therapeutically effective amount” of a compound is an amount sufficient to provide a therapeutic benefit in the treatment of a disease, disorder or condition, or to delay or minimize one or more symptoms associated with the disease, disorder or condition. A therapeutically effective amount of a compound means an amount of therapeutic agent, alone or in combination with other therapies, which provides a therapeutic benefit in the treatment of the disease, disorder or condition. The term “therapeutically effective amount” can encompass an amount that improves overall therapy, reduces or avoids symptoms or causes of disease or condition, or enhances the therapeutic efficacy of another therapeutic agent.
  • As used herein, and unless otherwise specified, a “prophylactically effective amount” of a compound is an amount sufficient to prevent a disease, disorder or condition, or one or more symptoms associated with the disease, disorder or condition, or prevent its recurrence. A prophylactically effective amount of a compound means an amount of a therapeutic agent, alone or in combination with other agents, which provides a prophylactic benefit in the prevention of the disease, disorder or condition. The term “prophylactically effective amount” can encompass an amount that improves overall prophylaxis or enhances the prophylactic efficacy of another prophylactic agent.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF CERTAIN EMBODIMENTS OF THE INVENTION
  • As generally described herein, the present invention provides C21-substituted neuroactive steroids designed, for example, to act as GABA modulators. In certain embodiments, such compounds are envisioned to be useful as therapeutic agents for the inducement of anesthesia and/or sedation in a subject. In certain embodiments, such compounds are envisioned to be useful as therapeutic agents for treating a CNS-related disorder.
  • Compounds
  • In one aspect, provided is a compound of Formula (I):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00026
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl; R1 is C1-6 alkyl; R2a is C1-6 alkyl; R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl; or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group; or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring (e.g., a 3-6-membered ring (e.g., carbocycyl or heterocyclyl ring)); R3 is absent or hydrogen; and
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, the other
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a single bond; and when one of the
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, R3 is absent.
  • In some embodiments, R1 is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl (e.g., haloalkyl). In some embodiments, R1 is methyl or CF3.
  • In some embodiments, R2a is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R2a is methyl. In some embodiments, R2b is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R2b is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R2a is methyl. In some embodiments, R2a is methyl and R2b is hydrogen.
  • In some embodiments, R3 is absent. In some embodiments, R3 is hydrogen.
  • In some embodiments,
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single bond. In some embodiments, one of
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a double bond and the other
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single bond.
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (II) or Formula (III):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00027
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein A, R1, R2a, and R2b are defined as for Formula (I).
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (II) is a compound of Formula (II-a) or Formula (II-b):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00028
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein A and R1 are defined as for Formula (I).
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (III) is a compound of Formula (III-a) or Formula (III-b):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00029
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein A and R1 are defined as for Formula (I).
  • In some embodiments, A is heterocyclyl or heteroaryl (e.g., nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl or a nitrogen-containing heteroaryl). In some embodiments, A is monocyclic or bicyclic. In some embodiments, A is substituted with at least one RA, wherein RA is C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-6 carbocylyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, halogen, cyano, —ORA6, —C(═O)ORA6, —SRB6, —S(═O)RB6, or S(═O)2RB6, wherein RA6 is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-6 carbocylyl, or C1-6 haloalkyl, and RB6 is C1-6 alkyl or C3-6 carbocylyl. In some embodiments, RA is C1-6 alkyl, halogen, or cyano. In some embodiments, A is substituted with 1-3 instances of RA.
  • In another aspect, provided is a compound of the Formula (IV):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00030
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof wherein A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl; R1 is C1-6 alkyl; R2a is C1-6 alkyl; R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl; or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group; or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring (e.g., a 3-6-membered ring (e.g., carbocycyl or heterocyclyl ring)); R3 is absent or hydrogen; RA is C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-6 carbocylyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, halogen, cyano, —ORA6, —C(═O)ORA6, —SRB6, —S(═O)RB6, or S(═O)2RB6, wherein RA6 is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-6 carbocylyl, or C1-6 haloalkyl, and RB6 is C1-6 alkyl or C3-6 carbocylyl; n is 0, 1, 2 or 3; and
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, the other
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a single bond; and when one of the
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    is a double bond, R3 is absent.
  • In some embodiments, R1 is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl (e.g., haloalkyl). In some embodiments, R1 is methyl or CF3.
  • In some embodiments, R2a is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R2a is methyl. In some embodiments, R2b is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R2b is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R2a is methyl. In some embodiments, R2a is methyl and R2b is hydrogen.
  • In some embodiments, R3 is absent. In some embodiments, R3 is hydrogen.
  • In some embodiments,
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single bond. In some embodiments, one of
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a double bond and the other
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
    represents a single bond.
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (IV) is a compound of Formula (V) or Formula (VI):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00031
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein A, R1, R2a, R2b, RA, and n are defined as for Formula (IV).
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (V) is a compound of Formula (V-a) or Formula (V-b):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00032
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein wherein A, R1, R2a, R2b, RA, and n are defined as for Formula (IV).
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (VI) is a compound of Formula (VI-a) or Formula (VI-b):
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00033
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein A, R1, are defined as for Formula (I).
  • In some embodiments, A is selected from:
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00034
  • In some embodiments, A is:
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00035
  • In some embodiments, the compound is selected from:
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00036
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00037
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00038
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00039
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • In one aspect, provided is a method for treating disorders related to GABA function in a subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or pharmaceutical composition of one of a compound as described herein, e.g., a compound of the Formula (I), Formula (II) (e.g., (II-a), (II-b)), Formula (III) (e.g., (III-a), (III-b)), Formula (IV), Formula (V) (e.g., (V-a), (V-b)), or Formula (VI) (e.g., (VI-a) or (VI-b)).
  • In one aspect, provided is a method for treating a CNS-related disorder in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound as described herein, e.g., a compound of the Formula (I), Formula (II) (e.g., (II-a), (II-b)), Formula (III) (e.g., (III-a), (III-b)), Formula (IV), Formula (V) (e.g., (V-a), (V-b)), or Formula (VI) (e.g., (VI-a) or (VI-b)), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In some embodiments, the CNS-related disorder is a sleep disorder, a mood disorder such as depression, a schizophrenia spectrum disorder, a convulsive disorder, a disorder of memory and/or cognition, a movement disorder, a personality disorder, autism spectrum disorder, pain, traumatic brain injury, a vascular disease, a substance abuse disorder and/or withdrawal syndrome, or tinnitus. In some embodiments, the subject is a subject with Rett syndrome, Fragile X syndrome, or Angelman syndrome.
  • In one aspect, provided is a kit comprising a solid composition comprising a compound as described herein, e.g., a compound of the Formula (I), Formula (II) (e.g., (II-a), (II-b)), Formula (III) (e.g., (III-a), (III-b)), Formula (IV), Formula (V) (e.g., (V-a), (V-b)), or Formula (VI) (e.g., (VI-a) or (VI-b)), and a sterile diluent.
  • Pharmaceutical Compositions
  • In one aspect, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the present invention (also referred to as the “active ingredient”) and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient. In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprises an effective amount of the active ingredient. In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprises a therapeutically effective amount of the active ingredient. In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprises a prophylactically effective amount of the active ingredient.
  • The pharmaceutical compositions provided herein can be administered by a variety of routes including, but not limited to, oral (enteral) administration, parenteral (by injection) administration, rectal administration, transdermal administration, intradermal administration, intrathecal administration, subcutaneous (SC) administration, intravenous (IV) administration, intramuscular (IM) administration, and intranasal administration.
  • Generally, the compounds provided herein are administered in an effective amount. The amount of the compound actually administered will typically be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
  • When used to prevent the onset of a CNS-disorder, the compounds provided herein will be administered to a subject at risk for developing the condition, typically on the advice and under the supervision of a physician, at the dosage levels described above. Subjects at risk for developing a particular condition generally include those that have a family history of the condition, or those who have been identified by genetic testing or screening to be particularly susceptible to developing the condition.
  • The pharmaceutical compositions provided herein can also be administered chronically (“chronic administration”). Chronic administration refers to administration of a compound or pharmaceutical composition thereof over an extended period of time, e.g., for example, over 3 months, 6 months, 1 year, 2 years, 3 years, 5 years, etc, or may be continued indefinitely, for example, for the rest of the subject's life. In certain embodiments, the chronic administration is intended to provide a constant level of the compound in the blood, e.g., within the therapeutic window over the extended period of time.
  • The pharmaceutical compostions of the present invention may be further delivered using a variety of dosing methods. For example, in certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition may be given as a bolus, e.g., in order to raise the concentration of the compound in the blood to an effective level. The placement of the bolus dose depends on the systemic levels of the active ingredient desired throughout the body, e.g., an intramuscular or subcutaneous bolus dose allows a slow release of the active ingredient, while a bolus delivered directly to the veins (e.g., through an IV drip) allows a much faster delivery which quickly raises the concentration of the active ingredient in the blood to an effective level. In other embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition may be administered as a continuous infusion, e.g., by IV drip, to provide maintenance of a steady-state concentration of the active ingredient in the subject's body. Furthermore, in still yet other embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition may be administered as first as a bolus dose, followed by continuous infusion.
  • The compositions for oral administration can take the form of bulk liquid solutions or suspensions, or bulk powders. More commonly, however, the compositions are presented in unit dosage forms to facilitate accurate dosing. The term “unit dosage forms” refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient. Typical unit dosage forms include prefilled, premeasured ampules or syringes of the liquid compositions or pills, tablets, capsules or the like in the case of solid compositions. In such compositions, the compound is usually a minor component (from about 0.1 to about 50% by weight or preferably from about 1 to about 40% by weight) with the remainder being various vehicles or excipients and processing aids helpful for forming the desired dosing form.
  • With oral dosing, one to five and especially two to four and typically three oral doses per day are representative regimens. Using these dosing patterns, each dose provides from about 0.01 to about 20 mg/kg of the compound provided herein, with preferred doses each providing from about 0.1 to about 10 mg/kg, and especially about 1 to about 5 mg/kg.
  • Transdermal doses are generally selected to provide similar or lower blood levels than are achieved using injection doses, generally in an amount ranging from about 0.01 to about 20% by weight, preferably from about 0.1 to about 20% by weight, preferably from about 0.1 to about 10% by weight, and more preferably from about 0.5 to about 15% by weight.
  • Injection dose levels range from about 0.1 mg/kg/hour to at least 20 mg/kg/hour, all for from about 1 to about 120 hours and especially 24 to 96 hours. A preloading bolus of from about 0.1 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg or more may also be administered to achieve adequate steady state levels. The maximum total dose is not expected to exceed about 5 g/day for a 40 to 80 kg human patient.
  • Liquid forms suitable for oral administration may include a suitable aqueous or nonaqueous vehicle with buffers, suspending and dispensing agents, colorants, flavors and the like. Solid forms may include, for example, any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.
  • Injectable compositions are typically based upon injectable sterile saline or phosphate-buffered saline or other injectable excipients known in the art. As before, the active compound in such compositions is typically a minor component, often being from about 0.05 to 10% by weight with the remainder being the injectable excipient and the like.
  • Transdermal compositions are typically formulated as a topical ointment or cream containing the active ingredient(s). When formulated as a ointment, the active ingredients will typically be combined with either a paraffinic or a water-miscible ointment base. Alternatively, the active ingredients may be formulated in a cream with, for example an oil-in-water cream base. Such transdermal formulations are well-known in the art and generally include additional ingredients to enhance the dermal penetration of stability of the active ingredients or Formulation. All such known transdermal formulations and ingredients are included within the scope provided herein.
  • The compounds provided herein can also be administered by a transdermal device. Accordingly, transdermal administration can be accomplished using a patch either of the reservoir or porous membrane type, or of a solid matrix variety.
  • The above-described components for orally administrable, injectable or topically administrable compositions are merely representative. Other materials as well as processing techniques and the like are set forth in Part 8 of Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th edition, 1985, Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • The compounds of the present invention can also be administered in sustained release forms or from sustained release drug delivery systems. A description of representative sustained release materials can be found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences.
  • The present invention also relates to the pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt of a compound of the present invention. The acid which may be used to prepare the pharmaceutically acceptable salt is that which forms a non-toxic acid addition salt, i.e., a salt containing pharmacologically acceptable anions such as the hydrochloride, hydroiodide, hydrobromide, nitrate, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, acetate, lactate, citrate, tartrate, succinate, maleate, fumarate, benzoate, para-toluenesulfonate, and the like.
  • In another aspect, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the present invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, e.g., a composition suitable for injection, such as for intravenous (IV) administration.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable excipients include any and all diluents or other liquid vehicles, dispersion or suspension aids, surface active agents, isotonic agents, preservatives, lubricants and the like, as suited to the particular dosage form desired, e.g., injection. General considerations in the formulation and/or manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions agents can be found, for example, in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Sixteenth Edition, E. W. Martin (Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1980), and Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 21st Edition (Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2005).
  • For example, injectable preparations, such as sterile injectable aqueous suspensions, can be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents. Exemplary excipients that can be employed include, but are not limited to, water, sterile saline or phosphate-buffered saline, or Ringer's solution.
  • In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition further comprises a cyclodextrin derivative. The most common cyclodextrins are α-, β- and γ-cyclodextrins consisting of 6, 7 and 8 α-1,4-linked glucose units, respectively, optionally comprising one or more substituents on the linked sugar moieties, which include, but are not limited to, substituted or unsubstituted methylated, hydroxyalkylated, acylated, and sulfoalkylether substitution. In certain embodiments, the cyclodextrin is a sulfoalkyl ether β-cyclodextrin, e.g., for example, sulfobutyl ether β-cyclodextrin, also known as Captisol®. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,376,645. In certain embodiments, the composition comprises hexapropyl-β-cyclodextrin. In a more particular embodiment, the composition comprises hexapropyl-β-cyclodextrin (10-50% in water).
  • The injectable composition can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable medium prior to use.
  • Generally, the compounds provided herein are administered in an effective amount. The amount of the compound actually administered will typically be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered, the age, weight, response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
  • The compositions are presented in unit dosage forms to facilitate accurate dosing. The term “unit dosage forms” refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient. Typical unit dosage forms include pre-filled, pre-measured ampules or syringes of the liquid compositions. In such compositions, the compound is usually a minor component (from about 0.1% to about 50% by weight or preferably from about 1% to about 40% by weight) with the remainder being various vehicles or carriers and processing aids helpful for forming the desired dosing form.
  • The compounds provided herein can be administered as the sole active agent, or they can be administered in combination with other active agents. In one aspect, the present invention provides a combination of a compound of the present invention and another pharmacologically active agent. Administration in combination can proceed by any technique apparent to those of skill in the art including, for example, separate, sequential, concurrent, and alternating administration.
  • Although the descriptions of pharmaceutical compositions provided herein are principally directed to pharmaceutical compositions which are suitable for administration to humans, it will be understood by the skilled artisan that such compositions are generally suitable for administration to animals of all sorts. Modification of pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration to humans in order to render the compositions suitable for administration to various animals is well understood, and the ordinarily skilled veterinary pharmacologist can design and/or perform such modification with ordinary experimentation. General considerations in the formulation and/or manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions can be found, for example, in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy 21st ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2005.
  • Methods of Use and Treatment
  • As generally described herein, the present invention is directed to C21-substituted neuroactive steroids designed, for example, to act as GABA modulators. In certain embodiments, such compounds are envisioned to be useful as therapeutic agents for the inducement of anesthesia and/or sedation in a subject. In some embodiments, such compounds are envisioned to be useful as therapeutic agents for treating a CNS-related disorder (e.g., sleep disorder, a mood disorder such as depression, a schizophrenia spectrum disorder, a convulsive disorder, a disorder of memory and/or cognition, a movement disorder, a personality disorder, autism spectrum disorder, pain, traumatic brain injury, a vascular disease, a substance abuse disorder and/or withdrawal syndrome, or tinnitus) in a subject in need (e.g., a subject with Rett syndrome, Fragile X syndrome, or Angelman syndrome).
  • Thus, in one aspect, the present invention provides a method of inducing sedation and/or anesthesia in a subject, comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the present invention or a composition thereof. In certain embodiments, the compound is administered by intravenous administration.
  • Earlier studies (see, e.g., Gee et al., European Journal of Pharmacology, 136:419-423 (1987)) demonstrated that certain 3α-hydroxylated steroids are orders of magnitude more potent as modulators of the GABA receptor complex (GRC) than others had reported (see, e.g., Majewska et al., Science 232:1004-1007 (1986); Harrison et al., J Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 241:346-353 (1987)). Majewska et al. and Harrison et al. taught that 3α-hydroxylated-5-reduced steroids are only capable of much lower levels of effectiveness. In vitro and in vivo experimental data have now demonstrated that the high potency of these steroids allows them to be therapeutically useful in the modulation of brain excitability via the GRC (see, e.g., Gee et al., European Journal of Pharmacology, 136:419-423 (1987); Wieland et al., Psychopharmacology 118(1):65-71 (1995)).
  • Various synthetic steroids have also been prepared as neuroactive steroids. See, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,232,917, which discloses neuroactive steroid compounds useful in treating stress, anxiety, insomnia, seizure disorders, and mood disorders such as depression, that are amenable to GRC-active agents, such as depression, in a therapeutically beneficial manner. Furthermore, it has been previously demonstrated that these steroids interact at a unique site on the GRC which is distinct from other known sites of interaction (e.g., barbiturates, benzodiazepines, and GABA) where therapeutically beneficial effects on stress, anxiety, sleep, mood disorders and seizure disorders have been previously elicited (see, e.g., Gee, K. W. and Yamamura, H. I., “Benzodiazepines and Barbiturates: Drugs for the Treatment of Anxiety, Insomnia and Seizure Disorders,” in Central Nervous System Disorders, Horvell, ed., Marcel-Dekker, New York (1985), pp. 123-147; Lloyd, K. G. and Morselli, P. L., “Psychopharmacology of GABAergic Drugs,” in Psychopharmacology: The Third Generation of Progress, H. Y. Meltzer, ed., Raven Press, N.Y. (1987), pp. 183-195; and Gee et al., European Journal of Pharmacology, 136:419-423 (1987). These compounds are desirable for their duration, potency, and oral activity (along with other forms of administration).
  • Compounds of the present invention, as described herein, are generally designed to modulate GABA function, and therefore to act as neuroactive steroids for the treatment and prevention of CNS-related conditions in a subject. Modulation, as used herein, refers to the inhibition or potentiation of GABA receptor function. Accordingly, the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions provided herein find use as therapeutics for preventing and/or treating CNS conditions in mammals including humans and non-human mammals. Thus, and as stated earlier, the present invention includes within its scope, and extends to, the recited methods of treatment, as well as to the compounds for such methods, and to the use of such compounds for the preparation of medicaments useful for such methods.
  • Exemplary CNS conditions related to GABA-modulation include, but are not limited to, sleep disorders [e.g., insomnia], mood disorders [e.g., depression, dysthymic disorder (e.g., mild depression), bipolar disorder (e.g., I and/or II), anxiety disorders (e.g., generalized anxiety disorder (GAD), social anxiety disorder), stress, post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD), compulsive disorders (e.g., obsessive compulsive disorder (OCD))], schizophrenia spectrum disorders [e.g., schizophrenia, schizoaffective disorder], convulsive disorders [e.g., epilepsy (e.g., status epilepticus (SE)), seizures], disorders of memory and/or cognition [e.g., attention disorders (e.g., attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD)), dementia (e.g., Alzheimer's type dementia, Lewis body type dementia, vascular type dementia], movement disorders [e.g., Huntington's disease, Parkinson's disease], personality disorders [e.g., anti-social personality disorder, obsessive compulsive personality disorder], autism spectrum disorders (ASD) [e.g., autism, monogenetic causes of autism such as synaptophathy's, e.g., Rett syndrome, Fragile X syndrome, Angelman syndrome], pain [e.g., neuropathic pain, injury related pain syndromes, acute pain, chronic pain], traumatic brain injury (TBI), vascular diseases [e.g., stroke, ischemia, vascular malformations], substance abuse disorders and/or withdrawal syndromes [e.g., addition to opiates, cocaine, and/or alcohol], and tinnitus.
  • In yet another aspect, provided is a combination of a compound of the present invention and another pharmacologically active agent. The compounds provided herein can be administered as the sole active agent or they can be administered in combination with other agents. Administration in combination can proceed by any technique apparent to those of skill in the art including, for example, separate, sequential, concurrent and alternating administration.
  • In another aspect, provided is a method of treating or preventing brain excitability in a subject susceptible to or afflicted with a condition associated with brain excitability, comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the present invention to the subject.
  • In yet another aspect, provided is a method of treating or preventing stress or anxiety in a subject, comprising administering to the subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound of the present invention, or a composition thereof.
  • In yet another aspect, provided is a method of alleviating or preventing seizure activity in a subject, comprising administering to the subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound of the present invention.
  • In yet another aspect, provided is a method of alleviating or preventing insomnia in a subject, comprising administering to the subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound of the present invention, or a composition thereof.
  • In yet another aspect, provided is a method of inducing sleep and maintaining substantially the level of REM sleep that is found in normal sleep, wherein substantial rebound insomnia is not induced, comprising administering an effective amount of a compound of the present invention.
  • In yet another aspect, provided is a method of alleviating or preventing PMS or PND in a subject, comprising administering to the subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound of the present invention.
  • In yet another aspect, provided is a method of treating or preventing mood disorders in a subject, comprising administering to the subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound of the present invention. In certain embodiments the mood disorder is depression.
  • In yet another aspect, provided is a method of inducing anesthesia in a subject, comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the present invention.
  • In yet another aspect, provided is a method of cognition enhancement or treating memory disorder by administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention. In certain embodiments, the disorder is Alzheimer's disease. In certain embodiments, the disorder is Rett syndrome.
  • In yet another aspect, provided is a method of treating attention disorders by administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention. In certain embodiments, the attention disorder is ADHD.
  • In certain embodiments, the compound is administered to the subject chronically. In certain embodiments, the compound is administered to the subject orally, subcutaneously, intramuscularly, or intravenously.
  • Anesthesia/Sedation
  • Anesthesia is a pharmacologically induced and reversible state of amnesia, analgesia, loss of responsiveness, loss of skeletal muscle reflexes, decreased stress response, or all of these simultaneously. These effects can be obtained from a single drug which alone provides the correct combination of effects, or occasionally with a combination of drugs (e.g., hypnotics, sedatives, paralytics, analgesics) to achieve very specific combinations of results. Anesthesia allows patients to undergo surgery and other procedures without the distress and pain they would otherwise experience.
  • Sedation is the reduction of irritability or agitation by administration of a pharmacological agent, generally to facilitate a medical procedure or diagnostic procedure.
  • Sedation and analgesia include a continuum of states of consciousness ranging from minimal sedation (anxiolysis) to general anesthesia.
  • Minimal sedation is also known as anxiolysis. Minimal sedation is a drug-induced state during which the patient responds normally to verbal commands. Cognitive function and coordination may be impaired. Ventilatory and cardiovascular functions are typically unaffected.
  • Moderate sedation/analgesia (conscious sedation) is a drug-induced depression of consciousness during which the patient responds purposefully to verbal command, either alone or accompanied by light tactile stimulation. No interventions are usually necessary to maintain a patent airway. Spontaneous ventilation is typically adequate. Cardiovascular function is usually maintained.
  • Deep sedation/analgesia is a drug-induced depression of consciousness during which the patient cannot be easily aroused, but responds purposefully (not a reflex withdrawal from a painful stimulus) following repeated or painful stimulation. Independent ventilatory function may be impaired and the patient may require assistance to maintain a patent airway. Spontaneous ventilation may be inadequate. Cardiovascular function is usually maintained.
  • General anesthesia is a drug-induced loss of consciousness during which the patient is not arousable, even to painful stimuli. The ability to maintain independent ventilatory function is often impaired and assistance is often required to maintain a patent airway. Positive pressure ventilation may be required due to depressed spontaneous ventilation or drug-induced depression of neuromuscular function. Cardiovascular function may be impaired.
  • Sedation in the intensive care unit (ICU) allows the depression of patients' awareness of the environment and reduction of their response to external stimulation. It can play a role in the care of the critically ill patient, and encompasses a wide spectrum of symptom control that will vary between patients, and among individuals throughout the course of their illnesses. Heavy sedation in critical care has been used to facilitate endotracheal tube tolerance and ventilator synchronization, often with neuromuscular blocking agents.
  • In some embodiments, sedation (e.g., long-term sedation, continuous sedation) is induced and maintained in the ICU for a prolonged period of time (e.g., 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 5 days, 1 week, 2 week, 3 weeks, 1 month, 2 months). Long-term sedation agents may have long duration of action. Sedation agents in the ICU may have short elimination half-life.
  • Procedural sedation and analgesia, also referred to as conscious sedation, is a technique of administering sedatives or dissociative agents with or without analgesics to induce a state that allows a subject to tolerate unpleasant procedures while maintaining cardiorespiratory function.
  • Anxiety Disorders
  • Anxiety disorder is a blanket term covering several different forms of abnormal and pathological fear and anxiety. Current psychiatric diagnostic criteria recognize a wide variety of anxiety disorders.
  • Generalized anxiety disorder is a common chronic disorder characterized by long-lasting anxiety that is not focused on any one object or situation. Those suffering from generalized anxiety experience non-specific persistent fear and worry and become overly concerned with everyday matters. Generalized anxiety disorder is the most common anxiety disorder to affect older adults.
  • In panic disorder, a person suffers from brief attacks of intense terror and apprehension, often marked by trembling, shaking, confusion, dizziness, nausea, difficulty breathing. These panic attacks, defined by the APA as fear or discomfort that abruptly arises and peaks in less than ten minutes, can last for several hours and can be triggered by stress, fear, or even exercise; although the specific cause is not always apparent. In addition to recurrent unexpected panic attacks, a diagnosis of panic disorder also requires that said attacks have chronic consequences: either worry over the attacks' potential implications, persistent fear of future attacks, or significant changes in behavior related to the attacks. Accordingly, those suffering from panic disorder experience symptoms even outside of specific panic episodes. Often, normal changes in heartbeat are noticed by a panic sufferer, leading them to think something is wrong with their heart or they are about to have another panic attack. In some cases, a heightened awareness (hypervigilance) of body functioning occurs during panic attacks, wherein any perceived physiological change is interpreted as a possible life threatening illness (i.e. extreme hypochondriasis).
  • Obsessive compulsive disorder is a type of anxiety disorder primarily characterized by repetitive obsessions (distressing, persistent, and intrusive thoughts or images) and compulsions (urges to perform specific acts or rituals). The OCD thought pattern may be likened to superstitions insofar as it involves a belief in a causative relationship where, in reality, one does not exist. Often the process is entirely illogical; for example, the compulsion of walking in a certain pattern may be employed to alleviate the obsession of impending harm. And in many cases, the compulsion is entirely inexplicable, simply an urge to complete a ritual triggered by nervousness. In a minority of cases, sufferers of OCD may only experience obsessions, with no overt compulsions; a much smaller number of sufferers experience only compulsions.
  • The single largest category of anxiety disorders is that of Phobia, which includes all cases in which fear and anxiety is triggered by a specific stimulus or situation. Sufferers typically anticipate terrifying consequences from encountering the object of their fear, which can be anything from an animal to a location to a bodily fluid.
  • Post-traumatic stress disorder or PTSD is an anxiety disorder which results from a traumatic experience. Post-traumatic stress can result from an extreme situation, such as combat, rape, hostage situations, or even serious accident. It can also result from long term (chronic) exposure to a severe stressor, for example soldiers who endure individual battles but cannot cope with continuous combat. Common symptoms include flashbacks, avoidant behaviors, and depression.
  • Neurodegenerative Diseases and Disorders
  • The term “neurodegenerative disease” includes diseases and disorders that are associated with the progressive loss of structure or function of neurons, or death of neurons. Neurodegenerative diseases and disorders include, but are not limited to, Alzheimer's disease (including the associated symptoms of mild, moderate, or severe cognitive impairment); amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS); anoxic and ischemic injuries; ataxia and convulsion (including for the treatment and prevention and prevention of seizures that are caused by schizoaffective disorder or by drugs used to treat schizophrenia); benign forgetfulness; brain edema; cerebellar ataxia including McLeod neuroacanthocytosis syndrome (MLS); closed head injury; coma; contusive injuries (e.g., spinal cord injury and head injury); dementias including multi-infarct dementia and senile dementia; disturbances of consciousness; Down syndrome; drug-induced or medication-induced Parkinsonism (such as neuroleptic-induced acute akathisia, acute dystonia, Parkinsonism, or tardive dyskinesia, neuroleptic malignant syndrome, or medication-induced postural tremor); epilepsy; fragile X syndrome; Gilles de la Tourette's syndrome; head trauma; hearing impairment and loss; Huntington's disease; Lennox syndrome; levodopa-induced dyskinesia; mental retardation; movement disorders including akinesias and akinetic (rigid) syndromes (including basal ganglia calcification, corticobasal degeneration, multiple system atrophy, Parkinsonism-ALS dementia complex, Parkinson's disease, postencephalitic parkinsonism, and progressively supranuclear palsy); muscular spasms and disorders associated with muscular spasticity or weakness including chorea (such as benign hereditary chorea, drug-induced chorea, hemiballism, Huntington's disease, neuroacanthocytosis, Sydenham's chorea, and symptomatic chorea), dyskinesia (including tics such as complex tics, simple tics, and symptomatic tics), myoclonus (including generalized myoclonus and focal cyloclonus), tremor (such as rest tremor, postural tremor, and intention tremor) and dystonia (including axial dystonia, dystonic writer's cramp, hemiplegic dystonia, paroxysmal dystonia, and focal dystonia such as blepharospasm, oromandibular dystonia, and spasmodic dysphonia and torticollis); neuronal damage including ocular damage, retinopathy or macular degeneration of the eye; neurotoxic injury which follows cerebral stroke, thromboembolic stroke, hemorrhagic stroke, cerebral ischemia, cerebral vasospasm, hypoglycemia, amnesia, hypoxia, anoxia, perinatal asphyxia and cardiac arrest; Parkinson's disease; seizure; status epilecticus; stroke; tinnitus; tubular sclerosis, and viral infection induced neurodegeneration (e.g., caused by acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS) and encephalopathies). Neurodegenerative diseases also include, but are not limited to, neurotoxic injury which follows cerebral stroke, thromboembolic stroke, hemorrhagic stroke, cerebral ischemia, cerebral vasospasm, hypoglycemia, amnesia, hypoxia, anoxia, perinatal asphyxia and cardiac arrest. Methods of treating or preventing a neurodegenerative disease also include treating or preventing loss of neuronal function characteristic of neurodegenerative disorder.
  • Epilepsy
  • Epilepsy is a brain disorder characterized by repeated seizures over time. Types of epilepsy can include, but are not limited to generalized epilepsy, e.g., childhood absence epilepsy, juvenile nyoclonic epilepsy, epilepsy with grand-mal seizures on awakening, West syndrome, Lennox-Gastaut syndrome, partial epilepsy, e.g., temporal lobe epilepsy, frontal lobe epilepsy, benign focal epilepsy of childhood.
  • Status Epilepticus (SE)
  • Status epilepticus (SE) can include, e.g., convulsive status epilepticus, e.g., early status epilepticus, established status epilepticus, refractory status epilepticus, super-refractory status epilepticus; non-convulsive status epilepticus, e.g., generalized status epilepticus, complex partial status epilepticus; generalized periodic epileptiform discharges; and periodic lateralized epileptiform discharges. Convulsive status epilepticus is characterized by the presence of convulsive status epileptic seizures, and can include early status epilepticus, established status epilepticus, refractory status epilepticus, super-refractory status epilepticus. Early status epilepticus is treated with a first line therapy. Established status epilepticus is characterized by status epileptic seizures which persist despite treatment with a first line therapy, and a second line therapy is administered. Refractory status epilepticus is characterized by status epileptic seizures which persist despite treatment with a first line and a second line therapy, and a general anesthetic is generally administered. Super refractory status epilepticus is characterized by status epileptic seizures which persist despite treatment with a first line therapy, a second line therapy, and a general anesthetic for 24 hours or more.
  • Non-convulsive status epilepticus can include, e.g., focal non-convulsive status epilepticus, e.g., complex partial non-convulsive status epilepticus, simple partial non-convulsive status epilepticus, subtle non-convulsive status epilepticus; generalized non-convulsive status epilepticus, e.g., late onset absence non-convulsive status epilepticus, atypical absence non-convulsive status epilepticus, or typical absence non-convulsive status epilepticus.
  • Compositions described herein can also be administered as a prophylactic to a subject having a CNS disorder e.g., a traumatic brain injury, status epilepticus, e.g., convulsive status epilepticus, e.g., early status epilepticus, established status epilepticus, refractory status epilepticus, super-refractory status epilepticus; non-convulsive status epilepticus, e.g., generalized status epilepticus, complex partial status epilepticus; generalized periodic epileptiform discharges; and periodic lateralized epileptiform discharges; prior to the onset of a seizure.
  • Seizure
  • A seizure is the physical findings or changes in behavior that occur after an episode of abnormal electrical activity in the brain. The term “seizure” is often used interchangeably with “convulsion.” Convulsions are when a person's body shakes rapidly and uncontrollably. During convulsions, the person's muscles contract and relax repeatedly.
  • Based on the type of behavior and brain activity, seizures are divided into two broad categories: generalized and partial (also called local or focal). Classifying the type of seizure helps doctors diagnose whether or not a patient has epilepsy.
  • Generalized seizures are produced by electrical impulses from throughout the entire brain, whereas partial seizures are produced (at least initially) by electrical impulses in a relatively small part of the brain. The part of the brain generating the seizures is sometimes called the focus.
  • There are six types of generalized seizures. The most common and dramatic, and therefore the most well known, is the generalized convulsion, also called the grand-mal seizure. In this type of seizure, the patient loses consciousness and usually collapses. The loss of consciousness is followed by generalized body stiffening (called the “tonic” phase of the seizure) for 30 to 60 seconds, then by violent jerking (the “clonic” phase) for 30 to 60 seconds, after which the patient goes into a deep sleep (the “postictal” or after-seizure phase). During grand-mal seizures, injuries and accidents may occur, such as tongue biting and urinary incontinence.
  • Absence seizures cause a short loss of consciousness (just a few seconds) with few or no symptoms. The patient, most often a child, typically interrupts an activity and stares blankly. These seizures begin and end abruptly and may occur several times a day. Patients are usually not aware that they are having a seizure, except that they may be aware of “losing time.”
  • Myoclonic seizures consist of sporadic jerks, usually on both sides of the body. Patients sometimes describe the jerks as brief electrical shocks. When violent, these seizures may result in dropping or involuntarily throwing objects.
  • Clonic seizures are repetitive, rhythmic jerks that involve both sides of the body at the same time.
  • Tonic seizures are characterized by stiffening of the muscles.
  • Atonic seizures consist of a sudden and general loss of muscle tone, particularly in the arms and legs, which often results in a fall.
  • Seizures described herein can include epileptic seizures; acute repetitive seizures; cluster seizures; continuous seizures; unremitting seizures; prolonged seizures; recurrent seizures; status epilepticus seizures, e.g., refractory convulsive status epilepticus, non-convulsive status epilepticus seizures; refractory seizures; myoclonic seizures; tonic seizures; tonic-clonic seizures; simple partial seizures; complex partial seizures; secondarily generalized seizures; atypical absence seizures; absence seizures; atonic seizures; benign Rolandic seizures; febrile seizures; emotional seizures; focal seizures; gelastic seizures; generalized onset seizures; infantile spasms; Jacksonian seizures; massive bilateral myoclonus seizures; multifocal seizures; neonatal onset seizures; nocturnal seizures; occipital lobe seizures; post traumatic seizures; subtle seizures; Sylvan seizures; visual reflex seizures; or withdrawal seizures.
  • Equivalents and Scope
  • In the claims articles such as “a,” “an,” and “the” may mean one or more than one unless indicated to the contrary or otherwise evident from the context. Claims or descriptions that include “or” between one or more members of a group are considered satisfied if one, more than one, or all of the group members are present in, employed in, or otherwise relevant to a given product or process unless indicated to the contrary or otherwise evident from the context. The invention includes embodiments in which exactly one member of the group is present in, employed in, or otherwise relevant to a given product or process. The invention includes embodiments in which more than one, or all of the group members are present in, employed in, or otherwise relevant to a given product or process.
  • Furthermore, the invention encompasses all variations, combinations, and permutations in which one or more limitations, elements, clauses, and descriptive terms from one or more of the listed claims is introduced into another claim. For example, any claim that is dependent on another claim can be modified to include one or more limitations found in any other claim that is dependent on the same base claim. Where elements are presented as lists, e.g., in Markush group format, each subgroup of the elements is also disclosed, and any element(s) can be removed from the group. It should it be understood that, in general, where the invention, or aspects of the invention, is/are referred to as comprising particular elements and/or features, certain embodiments of the invention or aspects of the invention consist, or consist essentially of, such elements and/or features. For purposes of simplicity, those embodiments have not been specifically set forth in haec verba herein. It is also noted that the terms “comprising” and “containing” are intended to be open and permits the inclusion of additional elements or steps. Where ranges are given, endpoints are included. Furthermore, unless otherwise indicated or otherwise evident from the context and understanding of one of ordinary skill in the art, values that are expressed as ranges can assume any specific value or sub-range within the stated ranges in different embodiments of the invention, to the tenth of the unit of the lower limit of the range, unless the context clearly dictates otherwise.
  • This application refers to various issued patents, published patent applications, journal articles, and other publications, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. If there is a conflict between any of the incorporated references and the instant specification, the specification shall control. In addition, any particular embodiment of the present invention that falls within the prior art may be explicitly excluded from any one or more of the claims. Because such embodiments are deemed to be known to one of ordinary skill in the art, they may be excluded even if the exclusion is not set forth explicitly herein. Any particular embodiment of the invention can be excluded from any claim, for any reason, whether or not related to the existence of prior art.
  • Those skilled in the art will recognize or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation many equivalents to the specific embodiments described herein. The scope of the present embodiments described herein is not intended to be limited to the above Description, but rather is as set forth in the appended claims. Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that various changes and modifications to this description may be made without departing from the spirit or scope of the present invention, as defined in the following claims.
  • EXAMPLES
  • In order that the invention described herein may be more fully understood, the following examples are set forth. The synthetic and biological examples described in this application are offered to illustrate the compounds, pharmaceutical compositions and methods provided herein and are not to be construed in any way as limiting their scope.
  • Materials and Methods
  • The compounds provided herein can be prepared from readily available starting materials using the following general methods and procedures. It will be appreciated that where typical or preferred process conditions (i.e., reaction temperatures, times, mole ratios of reactants, solvents, pressures, etc.) are given, other process conditions can also be used unless otherwise stated. Optimum reaction conditions may vary with the particular reactants or solvent used, but such conditions can be determined by one skilled in the art by routine optimization.
  • Additionally, as will be apparent to those skilled in the art, conventional protecting groups may be necessary to prevent certain functional groups from undergoing undesired reactions. The choice of a suitable protecting group for a particular functional group as well as suitable conditions for protection and deprotection are well known in the art. For example, numerous protecting groups, and their introduction and removal, are described in T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, Second Edition, Wiley, New York, 1991, and references cited therein.
  • The compounds provided herein may be isolated and purified by known standard procedures. Such procedures include (but are not limited to) recrystallization, column chromatography, HPLC, or supercritical fluid chromatography (SFC). The following schemes are presented with details as to the preparation of representative heteroaryls and heterocyclyls that have been listed herein. The compounds provided herein may be prepared from known or commercially available starting materials and reagents by one skilled in the art of organic synthesis. Exemplary chiral columns available for use in the separation/purification of the enantiomers/diastereomers provided herein include, but are not limited to, CHIRALPAK® AD-10, CHIRALCEL® OB, CHIRALCEL® OB-H, CHIRALCEL® OD, CHIRALCEL® OD-H, CHIRALCEL® OF, CHIRALCEL® OG, CHIRALCEL® OJ and CHIRALCEL® OK.
  • The stereochemistry assigned herein (e.g., the assignment of “R” or “S” to the C21 position of the steroid) may be tentatively (e.g., randomly) assigned. For example, a C21 position may be drawn in the “R” configuration when the C21 position is in the “S” configuration.
  • 1H-NMR reported herein (e.g., for intermediates) may be a partial representation of the full NMR spectrum of a compound, e.g., a compound described herein. For example, the reported 1H NMR may exclude the region between δ (ppm) of about 1 to about 2.5 ppm.
  • Exemplary general method for preparative HPLC: Column: Waters RBridge prep 10 □m C18, 19*250 mm. Mobile phase: acetonitrile, water (NH4HCO3) (30 L water, 24 g NH4HCO3, 30 mL NH3.H2O). Flow rate: 25 mL/min
  • Exemplary general method for analytical HPLC: Mobile phase: A: water (10 mM NH4HCO3), B: acetonitrile Gradient: 5%-95% B in 1.6 or 2 min Flow rate: 1.8 or 2 mL/min; Column: XBridge C18, 4.6*50 mm, 3.5 μm at 45 C.
  • Synthetic Methods Example 1. Synthesis of 1 and 2
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00040
  • To a solution of A1 (500 mg, 1.29 mmol) in THF (4 mL was added KOH (144 mg, 2.58 mmol) and MeI (200 mg, 1.41 mmol) at 25° C. The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 2 h. After TLC showed the starting material was consumed, the reaction mixture was treated with water (20 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (30 mL×2). The organic phase was washed with brine (30 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by prep-HPLC to afford (R)-1-((3R,5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S,17S)-3-hydroxy-3,13-dimethylhexadecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-17-yl)-2-(2H-1,2,3-triazol-2-yl)propan-1-one (79.5 mg, 15.4%) and (S)-1-((3R,5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S,17S)-3-hydroxy-3,13-dimethylhexadecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-17-yl)-2-(2H-1,2,3-triazol-2-yl)propan-1-one (93.1 mg, 18%) as white solid.
  • 1H NMR (1) (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.67 (s, 2H), 5.27-5.22 (m, 1H), 2.25-2.23 (m, 1H), 2.11-2.05 (m, 1H), 1.87-1.66 (m, 9H), 1.41-1.02 (m, 19H), 0.65 (s, 3H). LCMS Rt=0.945 min in 1.5 min chromatography, 5-95AB, purity 100%, MS ESI calcd. for C24H38N3O2 [M+H]+ 400, found 382 [M+H-18].
  • 1H NMR (2) (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.66 (s, 2H), 5.42-5.37 (m, 1H), 2.66-2.64 (m, 1H), 2.14-2.11 (m, 2H), 1.83-1.65 (m, 10H), 1.41-1.07 (m, 17H), 0.68 (s, 3H). LCMS Rt=0.922 min in 1.5 min chromatography, 5-95AB, purity 100%, MS ESI calcd. for C24H38N3O2 [M+H]+ 400, found 382 [M+H-18].
  • Example 2. Synthesis of 3 and 4
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00041
  • To a solution of A2 (400 mg, 0.976 mmol) in THF (3 mL) was added KOH (109 mg, 1.95 mmol) and MeI (1.58 g, 11.1 mmol) at 25° C. The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 2 h. After TLC showed the starting material was consumed, the reaction mixture was treated with water (20 mL) and extracted with ELOAc (30 mL×2), The organic phase was washed with brine (30 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (PE/EtOAc=5/1 to EtOAc) to afford 1-((S)-1-((3R,5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S,17S)-3-hydroxy-3,13-dimethylhexadecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-17-yl)-1-oxopropan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-4-carbonitrile (100 mg, 24.2%) and 1-((R)-1-((3R,5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S,17S)-3-hydroxy-3,13-dimethylhexadecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-17-yl)-1-oxopropan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-4-carbonitrile (139 mg, 33.6%) as a white solid.
  • 1H NMR (3) (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.99 (s, 1H), 7.77 (s, 1H), 5.27-5.25 (m, 1H), 2.73-2.71 (m, 1H), 2.18-2.13 (m, 2H), 1.81-1.58 (m, 10H), 1.48-1.07 (m, 17H), 0.56 (s, 3H). LCMS Rt=0.934 min in 1.5 min chromatography, 5-95AB, purity 100%, MS ESI calcd. for C26H38N3O2 [M+H]+ 424, found 406 [M+H-18].
  • 1H NMR (4) (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.87 (s, 1H), 7.81 (s, 1H), 5.06-5.01 (m, 1H), 2.48 (t, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 2.09-2.00 (m, 1H), 1.79-1.59 (m, 12H), 1.50-1.07 (m, 16H), 0.66 (s, 3H). LCMS Rt=0.946 min in 1.5 min chromatography, 5-95AB, purity 100%, MS ESI calcd. for C26H38N3O2 [M+H]+ 424, found 406 [M+H-18].
  • Example 3. Synthesis of 5
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00042
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00043
  • Step 1. Synthesis of A4.
  • To a solution of 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol (A3, 24 g, 109 mmol) in toluene (100 mL) was added AlMe3 (2 M in toluene, 27.3 mL, 54.6 mmol) dropwise at 10° C. The mixture was then stirred at 25° C. for 1 hour. To the mixture was added a solution of compound (5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S)-13-methyldodecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthrene-3,17(2H,4H)-dione (5 g, 18.2 mmol) in toluene (50 mL) dropwise at −70° C. dropwise under N2. The mixture was stirred at −70° C. for 1 hour. MeMgBr (3 M in ether, 18.2 mL, 54.6 mmol) was added dropwise at −70° C. The mixture was stirred at −70° C. for another 3 hours. TLC showed the reaction was completed. The mixture was poured into citric acid (150 mL, 20% aq.). The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (100 mL*2). The combined organic layer was concentrated under vacuum, purified by column chromatography on silica gel (petroleum ether:EtOAc=50:1 to 1:1) to give (3R,5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S)-3-hydroxy-3,13-dimethyltetradecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-17(2H)-one (4.8 g, 90%) as a white solid.
  • 1H NMR (A4) (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.50-2.35 (m, 1H), 2.14-2.01 (m, 1H), 1.96-1.00 (m, 25H), 0.85 (s, 3H).
  • Step 2. Synthesis of A5.
  • To a suspension of PPh3PrBr (19 g, 49.5 mmol) in THF (100 mL) was added t-BuOK (5.5 g, 49.5 mmol) at 25° C. The color of the suspension was turned to dark red. After stirring at 60° C. for 1 h, (3R,5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S)-3-hydroxy-3,13-dimethyltetradecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-17(2H)-one (4.8 g, 16.5 mmol) was added at 60° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 60° C. for 16 h. TLC showed the reaction was completed. To the reaction mixture was added water (50 mL) and EtOAc (100 mL). The color of the mixture was turned to light yellow. The organic layer was separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (100 mL). The combined organic layer was concentrated in vacuum, purified by column chromatography on silica gel (PE:EtOAc=100:1 to 20:1) to give (3R,5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S,Z)-3,13-dimethyl-17-propylidenehexadecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-3-ol (1.6 g, 30%) as colorless oil.
  • 1H NMR (A5) (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 5.06-4.95 (m, 1H), 2.42-2.32 (m, 1H), 2.26-2.00 (m, 4H), 1.90-1.05 (m, 21H), 1.00-0.85 (m, 9H).
  • Step 3. Synthesis of A6.
  • To a solution of (3R,5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S)-3,13-dimethyl-17-propylidenehexadecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-3-ol (1.6 g, 5.05 mmol) in THF (5 mL) was added BH3-Me2S (2.5 mL, 25 mmol) at 0° C. dropwise. The solution was stirred at 25° C. for 16 h. TLC (PE/EtOAc=5/1) showed the reaction was completed. After cooling to 0° C., NaOH (10%, 10 mL, aq.) was added very slowly. After the addition was complete, H2O2 (30%, 10 mL, aq.) was added slowly and the inner temperature was maintained below 10° C. The resulting solution was stirred at 25° C. for 1 h. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (50*2 mL). The combined organic layer was separated, washed with Na2S2O3 (500 mL, 20%, aq.), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuum to give (3R,5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S,17S)-17-(1-hydroxypropyl)-3,13-dimethylhexadecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-3-ol (1.6 g, 95%) as light yellow solid.
  • 1H NMR (A6) (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 3.55-3.45 (m, 1H), 1.95-0.60 (m, 37H).
  • Step 4. Synthesis of A7.
  • To a solution of (3R,5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S,17S)-17-(1-hydroxypropyl)-3,13-dimethylhexadecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-3-ol (1.6 g, 4.8 mmol) in DCM (20 mL), was added silica gel (4 g) and PCC (2 g, 9.6 mmol). The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 3 h. TLC showed the reaction was completed. The mixture was filtered and the filter cake was washed with DCM (20 mL). The combined filtrate was concentrated in vacuum, purified by column chromatography on silica gel column eluted with PE/EtOAc=10/1 to 8/1 to give 1-((3R,5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S,17S)-3-hydroxy-3,13-dimethylhexadecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-17-yl)propan-1-one (0.5 g, 31%) as light yellow solid.
  • 1H NMR (A7) (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.58-2.50 (m, 1H), 2.44-2.30 (m, 2H), 2.25-2.11 (m, 1H), 2.00-1.91 (m, 1H), 1.88-1.57 (m, 8H), 1.50-0.99 (m, 20H), 0.59 (s, 3H). LCMS (A7) Rt=1.315 min in 2 min chromatography, 10-80AB, purity 100%, MS ESI calcd. for C22H37O2 [M+H]+ 333, found 315 ([M+H-18]+).
  • Step 5. Synthesis of A8.
  • To a solution of 1-((3R,5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S,17S)-3-hydroxy-3,13-dimethylhexadecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-17-yl)propan-1-one (0.5 g, 1.5 mmol) in MeOH (5 mL) was added HBr (0.01 mL, 48% in water). Br2 (149 uL, 3 mmol) was added at 25° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 16 h. LCMS showed the reaction was completed. To the mixture was added Na2SO3 (10%, 10 mL, aq.) and extracted with EtOAc (50 mL*2). The combined organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, concentrated under vacuum to give 2-bromo-1-((3R,5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S,17S)-3-hydroxy-3,13-dimethylhexadecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-17-yl)propan-1-one (0.6 g, 97%) as a colorless oil.
  • 1H NMR (A8) (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 4.48-4.35 (m, 1H), 3.12-2.70 (m, 1H), 2.40-1.00 (m, 30H), 0.75-0.60 (m, 3H).
  • Step 6. Synthesis of 5.
  • To a solution of 2-bromo-1-((3R,5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S,17S)-3-hydroxy-3,13-dimethylhexadecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-17-yl)propan-1-one (200 mg, 0.49 mmol) in acetone (2 mL) was added morpholine (200 mg, 2.29 mmol). After stirring at 25° C. for 16 h, LCMS showed the reaction was completed. The reaction mixture was in vacuum to give the crude product which was purified by prep-HPLC to give 1-((3R,5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S,17S)-3-hydroxy-3,13-dimethylhexadecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-17-yl)-2-morpholinopropan-1-one, HCl salt (8.7 mg, 4.3%) as a light yellow solid.
  • 1H NMR (5) (400 MHz, methanol-d4) δ 4.45-4.20 (m, 1H), 4.15-4.00 (m, 2H), 3.95-3.80 (m, 2H), 3.55-3.45 (m, 1H), 3.30-3.20 (m, 2H), 3.02-2.65 (m, 1H), 2.25-2.10 (m, 2H), 2.00-1.75 (m, 8H), 1.75-1.25 (m, 17H), 1.25-1.10 (m, 3H), 0.90-0.70 (m, 3H). LCMS (5) Rt=1.972 min in 3 min chromatography, 10-80CD, purity 100%, MS ESI calcd. for C26H44NO3 [M+H]+ 418, found 418.
  • Example 4. Synthesis of 6 and 7
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00044
  • Step 1.
  • To a solution of A9 (500 mg, 1.25 mmol) in acetone (3 mL) was added 2H-benzo[d][1,2,3]triazole (222 mg, 1.87 mmol) at 25° C. and stirred at this temperature for 12 h. After TLC showed the starting material was consumed completely, the mixture was filtrated and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (PE/EtOAc=3/1 to 1/1) to afford A10 (200 mg, purity=60%) and A11 (400 mg, purity=70%) as white solid.
  • 1H NMR (A10): (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.87 (dd, J1=2.8 Hz, J2=6.4 Hz, 2H), 7.39 (dd, J1=2.8 Hz, J2=6.4 Hz, 2H), 5.56-5.51 (m, 2H), 2.69-2.65 (m, 1H), 2.23-2.16 (m, 2H), 1.87-1.60 (m, 11H), 1.45-1.01 (m, 66H), 0.87-075 (m, 25H)
  • 1H NMR (A11): (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.06 (d, J=8 Hz, 1H), 7.50-7.46 (m, 1H), 1.82-1.63 (m, 7H), 1.45-1.11 (m, 33H), 0.87-0.82 (m, 6H), 0.72 (s, 3H)
  • Step 2.
  • To a solution of A10 (200 mg, 0.459 mmol) in THF (3 mL) was added KOH (51.3 mg, 0.918 mmol) and MeI (1.14 g, 8.03 mmol) at 25° C. The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 2 h. After TLC showed the starting material was consumed, the reaction mixture was treated with water (20 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (30 mL×2). The organic phase was washed with brine (30 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by prep-HPLC to afford (S)-2-(2H-benzo[d][1,2,3]triazol-2-yl)-1-((3R,5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S,17S)-3-hydroxy-3,13-dimethylhexadecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-17-yl)propan-1-one (9.3 mg, 4.51%) and (R)-2-2H-benzo[d][1,2,3]triazol-2-yl)-1-((3R,5R,8R,9R,10S,13S,14S,17S)-3-hydroxy-3,13-dimethylhexadecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-17-yl)propan-1-one (6.1 mg, 2.96%) as white solid.
  • 1H NMR (6): (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.90 (dd, J1=3.2 Hz, J2=6.4 Hz, 2H), 7.41 (dd, J1=2.8 Hz, J2=6.4 Hz, 2H), 5.52-5.50 (m, 1H), 2.28-2.25 (m, 2H), 1.82-1.58 (m, 10H), 1.40-1.21 (m, 15H), 1.03-0.86 (m, 3H), 0.68 (s, 3H). LCMS Rt=1.014 min in 1.5 min chromatography, 5-95AB, purity 95%, MS ESI calcd. for C28H40N3O2 [M+H]+ 450, found 432 [M+H-18].
  • 1H NMR (7): (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.88 (dd, J1=3.2 Hz, J2=6.4 Hz, 2H), 7.38 (dd, J1=3.2 Hz, J2=6.4 Hz, 2H), 5.69-5.68 (m, 1H), 2.72-2.70 (m, 1H), 2.20-1.63 (m, 13H), 1.44-1.08 (m, 16H), 072 (s, 3H). LCMS Rt=0.991 min in 1.5 min chromatography, 5-95AB, purity 95%, MS ESI calcd. for C28H40N3O2 [M+H]+ 450, found 432 [M+H-18].
  • Example 5. Synthesis of 8 and 9
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00045
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00046
  • Step 1. Synthesis of A12-A.
  • To a solution of compound A3 (274 mg, 1 mmol) in methanol (4 mL) was added iodine (25.4 mg, 0.1 mmol). After stirring at 60° C. for 12 h, TLC showed no compound 2 remained and the solvent was removed in vacuo. The crude product was dissolved in dichloromethane (20 mL) and washed with saturated NaHCO3 (15 mL), brine (15 mL), dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by chromatography on basic alumina (petroleum ether/EtOAc=9:1) to give compound A12-A (280 mg, 88%) as a white solid.
  • 1H NMR (A11): (400 MHz, CDCl3), δ (ppm), 3.19 (s, 3H), 3.13 (s, 3H), 3.18-3.13 (dd, 1H, J=19.2, 8.8 Hz), 0.83 (s, 3H).
  • Step 2. Synthesis of A12.
  • A solution of CH3CH2CH2PPh3I (20.2 g, 47 mmol) and KOtBu (4.9 g, 43.6 mmol) in THF (40 mL) was heated to reflux for 1 h. Then compound A11 (5 g, 15.6 mmol) was added. The resulting solution was refluxed overnight, then TLC showed the reaction was complete. The reaction was cooled to room temperature and quenched with NaHCO3 (60 mL), the resulting solution was extracted with EtOAc (30 mL×3). The organic layer was washed with brine (30 mL), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo to give crude compound A12 (30 g, crude) which was used in the next step without further purification.
  • Step 3. Synthesis of A13.
  • To a solution of compound A12 (30 g, crude) in THF (40 mL) was added aqueous HCl (12 M, 5 mL) and stirred at room temperature for 30 min, then TLC showed the reaction was complete. The solution was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography (silica gel, EtOAc/PE=1:10) to give compound A13 (3.7 g, 80%, two steps yield) as a white solid.
  • 1H NMR: (500 MHz, CDCl3), δ (ppm), 5.06 (t, 1H, J=7.5 Hz), 2.63 (t, 1H, J=14 Hz), 0.96 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz), 0.93 (s, 3H).
  • Step 4. Synthesis of A14.
  • To a solution of compound A13 (1.5 g, 5 mmol) in THF (15 mL) was added TMSCF3 (850 mg, 6 mmol) and TBAF (130 mg, 0.5 mmol) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 h. Then TBAF (1M in THF, 10 mL) was added and stirred at room temperature for 30 min. TLC showed the reaction was complete. The reaction solution was concentrated and the residue was diluted with EtOAc (40 mL). The resulting solution was washed with brine (20 mL×2), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography (silica gel, EtOAc/PE=1:10) to give A14 (1.3 g, 70%) as a white solid.
  • 1H NMR (A14): (500 MHz, CDCl3), δ (ppm), 5.05-5.02 (m, 1H), 0.96 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz), 0.90 (s, 3H).
  • Step 5. Synthesis of A15.
  • To a solution of compound A14 (200 mg, 0.54 mmol) in anhydrous THF (5 mL) was added borane-tetrahydrofuran complex (1.0 M solution in THF, 2 mL, 2 mmol). After stirring at room temperature for 1 hour, the reaction mixture was cooled in an ice bath then quenched slowly with 10% aqueous NaOH (1 mL) followed 30% aqueous solution of H2O2 (1.2 mL). The mixture was allowed to stir at room temperature for 1 hour then extracted with EtOAc (3×10 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with 10% aqueous Na2S2O3 (10 mL), brine (10 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated to afford 7 (260 mg, crude) as white solid which was used in the next step without further purification.
  • Step 6. Synthesis of A16.
  • To a solution of compound A15 (300 mg, crude) was dissolved in 10 mL DCM was added Dess-Martin periodinate (980 mg, 2.31 mmol) and stirred at room temperature overnight. Then TLC showed the reaction was complete. The reaction was then filtered through a plug of celite and the filtrate was concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography (silica gel, EtOAc/PE=1:6) to give compound A16 (210 mg, 70%) as a white solid.
  • 1H NMR: (500 MHz, CDCl3), δ (ppm), 2.56 (t, 3H, J=9 Hz), 1.06 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz), 0.63 (s, 3H).
  • Step 7. Synthesis of A17 and A18.
  • To a solution of compound A16 (500 mg, 1.29 mmol) in MeOH (10 mL) was added 5 drops of HBr (48%) followed by bromine (1029 mg, 6.45 mmol). After stirring at room temperature for 2 h, the reaction mixture was poured into ice-water (20 mL) then the resulting mixture was extracted with EtOAc (15 mL×3), The combined organic layers were washed with brine (20 mL), dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated, the residue was purified by column chromatography (silica gel, EtOAc/PE=1:8) to give A17 (210 mg, 35%) and A18 (250 mg, 41%) as a white solid.
  • 1H NMR: (A17): (500 MHz, CDCl3), δ (ppm) 4.46-4.42 (q, 1H, J=7 Hz), 2.79 (t, 1H, J=9.5 Hz), 1.73 (d, 3H, J=7 Hz), 0.76 (s, 3H).
  • 1H NMR: (A18): (500 MHz, CDCl3), δ (ppm), 4.42-4.38 (q, 1H, J=6.5 Hz), 3.11 (t, 1H, J=9 Hz), 1.72 (d, 3H, J=6.5 Hz), 0.63 (s, 3H).
  • Step 8. Synthesis of 8.
  • To a solution of compound A17 (50 mg, 0.11 mmol) and Cs2CO3 (720 mg, 2.20 mmol) in THF (3 mL) was added 1H-pyrazole (150 mg, 2.2 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated at 30° C. and stirred overnight. LCMS showed the reaction was complete and the reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc (20 mL), washed with brine (10 mL), dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was purified by Prep-HPLC to give compound 8 as a white solid.
  • 1H NMR (8): (500 MHz, CDCl3), δ (ppm), 7.58 (d, 1H, J=2 Hz), 7.54 (d, 1H, J=1.5 Hz), 6.35 (t, 1H, J=4.5 Hz), 5.23 (q, 1HJ=7.5 Hz), 2.69 (t, 1H, J=9 Hz), 1.67 (d, 3H, J=7 Hz), 0.63 (s, 3H).
  • Example 6. Synthesis of 10 and 11
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00047
  • To a solution of A11 (400 mg, 0.918 mmol) in THF (5 mL) was added KOH (102 mg, 1.83 mmol) and MeI (156 mg, 1.10 mmol) at 25° C. The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 2 h. After TLC showed the starting material was consumed, the reaction mixture was treated with water (20 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (30 mL×2). The organic phase was washed with brine (30 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by prep-HPLC to afford compound 10 (63.3 mg, 15%) and compound 11 (33.4 mg, 8%) as off white solids.
  • 1H NMR (10): (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.09 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.48-7.41 (m, 1H), 7.39-7.37 (m, 2H), 5.62-5.60 (m, 1H), 2.34 (t, J=9.2 Hz 1H), 2.15-2.00 (m, 1H), 1.79-1.60 (m, 11H), 1.39-1.21 (m, 14H), 1.02-0.99 (m, 3H), 0.67 (s, 3H). LCMS Rt=0.972 min in 1.5 min chromatography, MS ESI calcd. for C28H40N3O2 [M+H]+ 450, found 450.
  • 1H NMR (11): (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.07 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.55 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.49-7.45 (m, 1H), 7.38-7.36 (m, 1H), 5.79-5.77 (m, 1H), 2.70-2.69 (m, 1H), 2.03-1.91 (m, 2H), 1.89-1.66 (m, 9H), 1.39-1.20 (m, 15H), 1.07-0.99 (m, 3H), 0.62 (s, 3H). LCMS Rt=0.954 min in 1.5 min chromatography, MS ESI calcd. for C28H40N3O2 [M+H]+ 450, found 450.
  • Example 7. Synthesis of 12 and 13
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00048
    Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00049
  • Step 1. Synthesis of A20.
  • To a suspension of EtPPh3Br (17.8 g, 48.2 mmol) in THF (60 mL) was added t-BuOK (5.40 g, 48.2 mmol). After stirring at 60° C. for 1 h, A19 (2.8 g, 9.64 mmol) was added in portions at 60° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at the same temperature for 8 h. TLC (PE/EtOAc=3/1) showed the reaction was complete, and a main product was found with lower polarity. The reaction mixture was quenched with aq.NH4Cl (50 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (50 mL×3) for three times. The combined organic layer was washed with brine (50 mL), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuum to give the crude product. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (PE:EA=10:1-6:1) to give A20 (2.6 g, 89%) as an off white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 5.15-5.10 (m, 1H), 2.42-2.12 (m, 3H), 1.75-0.95 (m, 26H), 0.90 (s, 3H), 0.79-0.62 (m, 2H).
  • Step 2. Synthesis of A21.
  • To a solution of A20 (2.6 g, 8.59 mmol) in THF (20 mL) was added dropwise a solution of BH3-Me2S (8.59 mL, 10 M) at 0° C. The solution was stirred at 25° C. for 8 h. TLC (PE:EtOAc=3:1) showed the reaction was almost complete, and a main product was found with higher polarity. After cooling to 0° C., a solution of NaOH (34.3 mL, 3M) was added very slowly. After the addition, H2O2 (15.5 mL, 33%) was added slowly and the inner temperature was maintained below 10° C. The resulting solution was stirred at 25° C. for 2 h. The resulting solution was extract with EtOAc (20 mL×3). The combined organic solution was washed with saturated aqueous Na2S2O3 (20 mL×2), brine (20 mL), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuum to give the crude product A21 (3 g, crude) as a solid. The crude product was used for the next step without further purification.
  • Step 3. Synthesis of A22.
  • A mixture of A21 (3 g, 9.36 mmol), PCC (3.01 g, 14.0 mmol) and silica gel (3.31 g, w/w=1/1.1) in DCM (50 mL) was stirred at 25° C. for 2 h, the reaction mixture color became brown. TLC (PE/EtOAc=3/1) showed the reaction was complete, and a main product was found with lower polarity. The solution was filtered and the filter cake was washed with DCM (20 mL). The combined filtrate was concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by silica gel column eluted with PE/EtOAc=15/1 to 6/1 to give A22 (2.3 g, 77%) as an off white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.59-2.51 (m, 1H), 2.22-2.12 (m, 4H), 2.06-1.97 (m, 1H), 1.88-0.95 (m, 23H), 0.80-0.62 (m, 5H).
  • Step 4. Synthesis of A23.
  • To a solution of A22 (2.3 g, 7.22 mmol) and a catalytic amount of concentrated HBr (28.9 mg, 40% in water) in MeOH (20 mL) was added dropwise dibromine (1.27 g, 7.94 mmol) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 2 h. TLC (PE:EtOAc=3:1) showed the reaction was complete. The reaction was quenched by saturated aqueous NaHCO3 and the pH was adjusted to 7˜8. The reaction mixture was extracted with DCM (20 mL×2). The combined organic layer was washed with brine (20 mL), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to get the crude product A23 (2.6 g, 91%) as an off white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 3.98-3.90 (m, 2H), 2.89-2.81 (m, 1H), 2.26-2.15 (m, 1H), 1.98-0.95 (m, 24H), 0.81-0.62 (m, 5H).
  • Step 5. Synthesis of A24.
  • To a solution of A23 (300 mg, 754 μmol) in acetone (10 mL) was added K2CO3 (155 mg, 1.13 mmol) and 1H-pyrazole-4-carbonitrile (84.1 mg, 904 μmol). The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 4 hours. TLC (PE/EA=3/1) showed the starting material was consumed completely. The solvent was removed by rotary evaporator. To the mixture was added water (10 mL) and ethyl acetate (10 mL). The organic layer was separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with ethyl acetate (10 mL×2). The combined organic layers was washed with brine (10 mL), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the crude product A24 (350 mg) as an off white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.88 (s, 1H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 5.06-4.90 (m, 2H), 2.68-2.59 (m, 1H), 2.28-1.98 (m, 1H), 1.92-1.01 (m, 24H), 0.82-0.65 (m, 5H).
  • Step 5. Synthesis of 12 and 13.
  • To a solution of A24 (400 mg, 976 μmol) in THF (10 mL) was added KOH (81.7 mg, 1.46 mmol) and MeI (207 mg, 1.46 mmol) at 25° C. The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 2 h. After LCMS showed the starting material was consumed, the reaction mixture was treated with water (20 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (20 mL×2). The organic phase was washed with brine (20 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by prep-HPLC to afford both compound 12 (61 mg, 14.7%) and compound 13 (43 mg, 10.4%) as off white solids.
  • 1H NMR (12): (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.01 (s, 1H), 7.79 (s, 1H), 5.32-5.27 (m, 1H), 2.78-2.74 (m, 1H), 2.21-2.15 (m, 2H), 1.92-0.98 (m, 26H), 0.79-0.65 (m, 2H), 0.61 (s, 3H). LCMS Rt=0.960 min in 1.5 min chromatography, MS ESI calcd. for C26H37N3O2 [M+H]+ 424, found 424.
  • 1H NMR (13) (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.89 (s, 1H), 7.83 (s, 1H), 5.09-5.04 (m, 1H), 2.55-2.49 (m, 1H), 2.16-2.05 (m, 2H), 1.91-0.95 (m, 26H), 0.78-0.60 (m, 5H). LCMS Rt=0.968 min in 1.5 min chromatography, MS ESI calcd. for C26H37N3O2 [M+H]+ 424, found 406 [M+H-18]+.
  • Example 8. Synthesis of 14 and 15
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00050
  • Step 1. Synthesis of A24 and A25.
  • To a solution of A23 (400 mg, 1 mmol, 1.00 eq) in acetone (5.00 mL) was added K2CO3 (276 mg, 2 mmol, 2 eq) and 2H-1,2,3-triazole (103 mg, 1.5 mmol, 1.5 eq). The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 12 hours, until TLC showed the reaction was complete. The reaction was quenched by water (30 mL) and then extracted with EA (30 mL*2). The combined organic phase was washed with saturated brine, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate=3/1 to EA) to afford compound A24 (125 mg, 31% yield) and compound A25 (185 mg, 45% yield) as solids.
  • 1H NMR (A24): (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 7.71 (s, 2H), 5.26 (d, J=5.27 Hz, 2H), 2.66-2.56 (m, 1H), 2.30-2.05 (m, 2H), 1.94-1.84 (m, 1H), 1.83-1.64 (m, 6H), 1.50-0.96 (m, 25H), 0.94-0.82 (m, 3H), 0.80-0.67 (m, 6H).
  • 1H NMR (A25): (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 7.78 (s, 1H), 7.66 (s, 1H), 5.34-5.09 (m, 2H), 2.76-2.63 (m, 1H), 2.32-2.06 (m, 2H), 1.96-1.65 (m, 7H), 1.57-1.47 (m, 2H), 1.23 (m, 17H), 0.90-0.74 (m, 3H), 0.70 (s, 3H).
  • Step 2. Synthesis of 14 and 15.
  • To a solution of A24 (125 mg, 324 umol, 1.00 eq) and KOH (36.3 mg, 648 umol, 2 eq) in THF (3.00 mL) was added CH3I (55 mg, 388 umol, 1.2 eq). The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 16 hrs until TLC analysis showed the reaction was complete. The reaction was quenched with water and extracted with EA (2*30 mL), the combined organic phase was washed with brine and dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by prep-HPLC (0.05% HCl) to afford compound 14 (27.4 mg, 21% yield) and compound 15 (24.9 mg, 19% yield) as off white solids.
  • 1H NMR (14) (CDCl3 400 MHz) δ 7.67 (s, 2H), 5.30-5.21 (m, 1H), 2.31-2.22 (m, 1H), 2.18-2.05 (m, 1H), 1.90-1.71 (m, 3H), 1.70-1.49 (m, 11H), 1.39-1.22 (m, 3H), 1.20 (s, 3H), 1.12-0.89 (m, 7H), 0.67 (s, 3H), 0.65-0.62 (m, 2H). LCMS Rt=1.168 min in 2 min chromatography, MS ESI calcd. for C24H37N3O2 [M+H]+ 400, found 382 [M+H-18].
  • 1H NMR (15) (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 7.67 (s, 2H), 5.47-5.36 (m, 1H), 2.71-2.61 (m, 1H), 2.18-2.06 (m, 2H), 1.86-1.83 (m, 4H), 1.79-1.72 (m, 1H), 1.69-1.64 (m, 4H), 1.60-1.51 (m, 2H), 1.42-1.28 (m, 4H), 1.25-1.19 (m, 6H), 1.17-0.9 (m, 6H), 0.75-0.66 (m, 5H). LCMS Rt=1.134 min in 2 min chromatography, MS ESI calcd. for C24H37N3O2 [M+H]+ 400, found 382 [M+H-18].
  • Example 9. Synthesis of 16 and 17
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00051
  • To a solution of A25 (185 mg, 479 umol, 1.00 eq) and KOH (53.7 mg, 958 umol, 2 eq) in THF (3.00 mL) was added CH3I (81.4 mg, 574 umol, 1.2 eq). The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 5 hrs until TLC showed the reaction was complete. Then, the reaction was quenched with water and extracted with EA (2*30 mL), the combined organic phase was washed with brine and dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by prep-HPLC (0.05% HCl) to afford compound 16 (18.5 mg, 10% yield) and compound 17 (31.4 mg, 16% yield) as off white solids.
  • 1H NMR (16) (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 7.75 (s, 1H), 7.59 (s, 1H), 5.52-5.42 (m, 1H), 2.60-2.52 (m, 1H), 2.13-2.00 (m, 1H), 1.94-1.81 (m, 2H), 1.77-1.53 (m, 12H), 1.48-1.39 (m, 1H), 1.38-1.23 (m, 3H), 1.21-1.19 (m, 3H), 1.18-1.03 (m, 5H), 1.02-0.89 (m, 2H), 0.73-0.65 (m, 5H). LCMS Rt=1.054 min in 2 min chromatography, MS ESI calcd. for C24H37N3O2 [M+H]+ 400, found 422 [M+23].
  • 1H NMR (17) (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ7.80 (s, 1H), 7.75 (s, 1H), 5.70-5.62 (m, 1H), 2.83-2.76 (m, 1H), 2.24-2.14 (m, 2H), 1.91-1.82 (m, 1H), 1.78-1.65 (m, 8H), 1.59-1.45 (m, 5H), 1.40-1.30 (m, 2H), 1.28-1.23 (m, 2H), 1.21 (s, 3H), 1.16-0.94 (m, 6H), 0.80-0.61 (m, 2H), 0.54 (s, 3H). LCMS Rt=1.020 min in 2 min chromatography, MS ESI calcd. for C24H37N3O2 [M+H]+ 400, found 422 [M+23]+.
  • Example 10. Synthesis of 18 and 19
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00052
  • Step 1. Synthesis of A26 and A27.
  • To a solution of A23 (600 mg, 1.5 mmol, 1.00 eq) in acetone (10 mL) was added K2CO3 (414 mg, 3 mmol, 2 eq) and 2H-benzo[d][1,2,3] triazole (268 mg, 2.25 mmol, 1.5 eq). The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 12 hours. The reaction was quenched by water (50 mL) and then extracted with EA (50 mL*2). The combined organic phase was washed with saturated brine, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (100-200 mesh silica gel, Petroleum ether/Ethyl acetate=5/1) to afford A26 (170 mg, 292 umol, 19.4% yield, 75% purity) and A27 (405 mg, 883 umol, 58.8% yield, 95% purity) as off-white solids.
  • 1H NMR (A26): (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 7.89-7.88 (m, 2H), 7.42-7.40 (m, 2H), 5.60-5.50 (m, 2H), 2.71-2.67 (m, 1H), 2.23-2.15 (m, 2H), 0.77 (s, 3H).
  • 1H NMR (A27): (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 8.10 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.51-7.50 (m, 1H), 7.42-7.35 (m, 2H), 5.49-5.39 (m, 2H), 2.76-2.74 (m, 1H), 2.23-2.16 (m, 2H), 0.76 (s, 3H).
  • Step 2. Synthesis of 18 and 19.
  • To a solution A26 (170 mg, 390 umol, 1.00 eq) and KOH (43.7 mg, 780 umol, 2 eq) in THF (3.00 mL) was added CH3I (66.4 mg, 468 umol, 1.2 eq). The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 16 hrs. Then, the reaction was quenched with water and extracted with EA (2*30 mL), the combined organic phase was washed with brine and dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by Prep-HPLC (0.5% HCl) to afford compound 18 (28 mg, 16% yield) and compound 19 (18.5 mg, 10.5% yield) as off white solids.
  • 1H NMR (18) (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 7.96-7.87 (m, 2H), 7.48-7.39 (m, 2H), 5.57-5.52 (m, 1H), 2.33-2.29 (m, 1H), 2.23-2.11 (m, 1H), 1.99-1.91 (m, 1H), 1.86-1.74 (m, 5H), 1.71-1.60 (m, 2H), 1.53-1.52 (m, 3H), 1.39-0.87 (m, 16H), 0.71 (s, 3H), 0.61-0.69 (m, 2H). LCMS Rt=1.285 min in 2 min chromatography, MS ESI calcd. for C28H39N3O2 [M+H]+ 450, found 432 [M+H-18].
  • 1H NMR (19) (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 7.95-7.86 (m, 2H), 7.45-7.37 (m, 2H), 5.76-5.67 (m, 1H), 2.80-2.70 (m, 1H), 2.28-2.09 (m, 2H), 2.00 (d, J=7.28 Hz, 3H), 1.91-1.53 (m, 9H), 1.46-1.30 (m, 4H), 1.27-0.96 (m, 10H), 0.75 (s, 3H), 0.71-0.68 (m, 2H). LCMS Rt=1.248 min in 2 min chromatography, MS ESI calcd. for C28H39N3O2 [M+H]+ 450, found 432 [M+H-18]+
  • Example 11. Synthesis of 20 and 21
  • Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00053
  • To a solution of A27 (405 mg, 929 umol, 1.00 eq) and KOH (103 mg, 1.85 mmol, 2 eq) in THF (6.00 mL) was added CH3I (157 mg, 1.11 mmol, 1.2 eq). The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 5 hrs. Then, the reaction was quenched with water and extracted with EA (2*50 mL), the combined organic phase was washed with brine and dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by Prep-HPLC (0.5% HCl) to afford compound 20 (107 mg, 26% yield) and compound 21 (64 mg, 15% yield) as off white solids.
  • 1H NMR (20): (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 8.12 (d, J=8 Hz, 1H), 7.53-7.47 (m, 1H), 7.45-7.38 (m, 2H), 5.70-5.61 (m, 1H), 2.42-2.34 (m, 1H), 2.17-2.06 (m, 1H), 1.94-1.87 (m, 1H), 1.86-1.79 (m, 1H), 1.79-1.75 (m, 3H), 1.74-1.63 (m, 2H), 1.63-1.49 (m, 6H), 1.44-1.23 (m, 5H), 1.21 (s, 3H), 1.16-0.85 (m, 6H), 0.71 (s, 3H), 0.68-0.60 (m, 2H). LCMS SAGE-WZF-010-P2B Rt=1.195 min in 2 min chromatography, MS ESI calcd. for C28H39N3O2 [M+H]+ 450, found 450.
  • 1H NMR (21): (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 8.09 (d, J=12 Hz, 1H), 7.58 (d, J=8 Hz, 1H), 7.49 (m, t, J=8 Hz, 1H), 7.39 (t, J=8 Hz, 1H), 5.85-5.76 (m, 1H), 2.78-2.70 (m, 1H), 2.15-2.00 (m, 2H), 1.93 (d, J=7.28 Hz, 3H), 1.88-1.52 (m, 9H), 1.41-1.29 (m, 4H), 1.26-0.49 (m, 10H), 0.73-0.68 (m, 2H), 0.65 (s, 3H). LCMS Rt=1.178 min in 2 min chromatography, MS ESI calcd. for C28H39N3O2 [M+H]+ 450, found 450
  • Assay Methods
  • Compounds provided herein can be evaluated using various assays; examples of which are described below.
  • Steroid Inhibition of TBPS Binding
  • TBPS binding assays using rat brain cortical membranes in the presence of 5 μM GABA has been described (Gee et al, J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 1987, 241, 346-353; Hawkinson et al, Mol. Pharmacol. 1994, 46, 977-985; Lewin, A. H et al., Mol. Pharmacol. 1989, 35, 189-194).
  • Briefly, cortices are rapidly removed following decapitation of carbon dioxide-anesthetized Sprague-Dawley rats (200-250 g). The cortices are homogenized in 10 volumes of ice-cold 0.32 M sucrose using a glass/teflon homogenizer and centrifuged at 1500×g for 10 min at 4° C. The resultant supernatants are centrifuged at 10,000×g for 20 min at 4° C. to obtain the P2 pellets. The P2 pellets are resuspended in 200 mM NaCl/50 mM Na—K phosphate pH 7.4 buffer and centrifuged at 10,000×g for 10 min at 4° C. This washing procedure is repeated twice and the pellets are resuspended in 10 volumes of buffer. Aliquots (100 μL) of the membrane suspensions are incubated with 3 nM [35S]-TBPS and 5 μL aliquots of test drug dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) (final 0.5%) in the presence of 5 μM GABA. The incubation is brought to a final volume of 1.0 mL with buffer. Nonspecific binding is determined in the presence of 2 μM unlabeled TBPS and ranged from 15 to 25%. Following a 90 min incubation at room temp, the assays are terminated by filtration through glass fiber filters (Schleicher and Schuell No. 32) using a cell harvester (Brandel) and rinsed three times with ice-cold buffer. Filter bound radioactivity is measured by liquid scintillation spectrometry. Non-linear curve fitting of the overall data for each drug averaged for each concentration is done using Prism (GraphPad). The data are fit to a partial instead of a full inhibition model if the sum of squares is significantly lower by F-test. Similarly, the data are fit to a two component instead of a one component inhibition model if the sum of squares is significantly lower by F-test. The concentration of test compound producing 50% inhibition (IC50) of specific binding and the maximal extent of inhibition (Imax) are determined for the individual experiments with the same model used for the overall data and then the means±SEM.s of the individual experiments are calculated. Picrotoxin serves as the positive control for these studies as it has been demonstrated to robustly inhibit TBPS binding.
  • Various compounds are or can be screened to determine their potential as modulators of [35S]-TBPS binding in vitro. These assays are or can be performed in accordance with the above discussed procedures.
  • For Table 1, “A” indicates an IC50<50 nM, “B” indicates an IC50 of 50 nM to 100 nM, “C” indicates an IC50 100 nM to 250 nM, “D” indicates an IC50 of 250 nM to 500 nM, and “E” indicates IC50>500 nM.
  • TABLE 1
    35S-TBPS
    Radioligand
    Displacement
    Compound (IC50)
    1 D
    2 B
    3 A
    4 B
    5 D
    6 A
    7 D
    8 D
    9 D
    10 A
    11 D
    12 C
    13 C
    14 E
    15 E
    16 E
    17 E
    18 B
    19 E
    20 E
    21 C

Claims (52)

1. A compound of the Formula (I):
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00054
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
R1 is C1-6 alkyl;
R2a is C1-6 alkyl;
R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl;
or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group;
or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring;
R3 is absent or hydrogen; and
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a double bond, the other
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a single bond; and when one of the
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a double bond, R3 is absent.
2. The compound of claim 1, wherein R1 is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl.
3. The compound of claim 1, wherein R1 is methyl or CF3.
4. The compound of claim 1, wherein R2a is methyl.
5. The compound of claim 1, wherein R2b is hydrogen.
6. The compound of claim 1, wherein R2a is methyl and R2b is hydrogen.
7. The compound of any one claim 1, wherein
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
represents a single bond.
8. The compound of claim 1, wherein the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (II) or Formula (III):
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00055
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein A, R1, R2a, and R2b are defined as for Formula (I).
9. The compound of claim 1, wherein the compound of Formula (II) is a compound of Formula (II-a) or Formula (II-b):
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00056
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein A and R1 are defined as for Formula (I).
10. The compound of claim 1, wherein the compound of Formula (III) is a compound of Formula (III-a) or Formula (III-b):
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00057
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein A and R1 are defined as for Formula (I).
11. The compound of claim 1, wherein A is heterocyclyl or heteroaryl.
12. The compound of claim 1, wherein A is monocyclic or bicyclic.
13. The compound of claim 1, wherein A is substituted with at least one RA, wherein RA is C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-6 carbocylyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, halogen, cyano, —ORA6, —C(═O)ORA6, —SRB6, —S(═O)RB6, or S(═O)2RB6, wherein RA6 is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-6 carbocylyl, or C1-6 haloalkyl, and RB6 is C1-6 alkyl or C3-6 carbocylyl.
14. The compound of claim 13, wherein RA is C1-6 alkyl, halogen, or cyano.
15. The compound of claim 13, wherein A is substituted with 1-3 instances of RA.
16. A compound of the Formula (IV):
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00058
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof wherein:
A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
R1 is C1-6 alkyl;
R2a is C1-6 alkyl;
R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl;
or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group;
or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring;
R3 is absent or hydrogen;
RA is C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-6 carbocylyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, halogen, cyano, —ORA6, —C(═O)ORA6, —SRB6, —S(═O)RB6, or S(═O)2RB6, wherein RA6 is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-6 carbocylyl, or C1-6 haloalkyl, and RB6 is C1-6 alkyl or C3-6 carbocylyl;
n is 0, 1, 2 or 3; and
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a double bond, the other
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a single bond; and when one of the
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a double bond, R3 is absent.
17. The compound of claim 16, wherein R1 is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl.
18. The compound of claim 16, wherein R1 is methyl or CF3.
19. The compound of claim 16, wherein R2a is methyl.
20. The compound of claim 16, wherein R2b is hydrogen.
21. The compound of claim 16, wherein R2a is methyl and R2b is hydrogen.
22. The compound of claim 16, wherein
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
represents a single bond.
23. The compound of claim 16, wherein the compound of Formula (IV) is a compound of Formula (V) or Formula (VI):
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00059
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein A, R1, R2a, R2b, RA, and n are defined as for Formula (IV).
24. The compound of claim 16, wherein the compound of Formula (V) is a compound of Formula (V-a) or Formula (V-b):
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00060
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein A, R1, R2a, R2b, RA, and n are defined as for Formula (IV).
25. The compound of claim 16, wherein the compound of Formula (VI) is a compound of Formula (VI-a) or Formula (VI-b):
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00061
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein A, R1, are defined as for Formula (I).
26. The compound of claim 1, wherein A is selected from:
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00062
27. The compound of claim 1, wherein A is selected from:
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00063
28. The compound of claim 1, wherein the compound is selected from:
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00064
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00065
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00066
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00067
29. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of claim 1 and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
30. A method of inducing sedation and/or anesthesia in a subject, comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the Formula (I):
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00068
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
R1 is C1-6 alkyl;
R2a is C1-6 alkyl;
R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl;
or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group;
or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring;
R3 is absent or hydrogen; and
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a double bond, the other
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a single bond; and when one of the
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a double bond, R3 is absent.
31. A method of administering an effective amount of a compound, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or pharmaceutical composition of claim 1 to a subject in need thereof, wherein the subject experiences sedation and/or anesthesia within two hours of administration.
32. The method of claim 31, wherein the subject experiences sedation and/or anesthesia within one hour of administration.
33. The method of claim 31, wherein the subject experiences sedation and/or anesthesia instantaneously.
34. The method of claim 31, wherein the compound is administered by intravenous administration.
35. The method of claim 31, wherein the compound is administered chronically.
36. The method of claim 31, wherein the subject is a mammal.
37. The method of claim 36, wherein the subject is a human.
38. The method of claim 31, wherein the compound is administered in combination with another therapeutic agent.
39. A method for treating seizure in a subject, comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the Formula (I):
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00069
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
R1 is C1-6 alkyl;
R2a is C1-6 alkyl;
R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl;
or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group;
or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring;
R3 is absent or hydrogen; and
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00002
represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00002
is a double bond, the other
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00002
is a single bond; and when one of the
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00002
is a double bond, R3 is absent.
40. A method for treating epilepsy or status or status epilepticus in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound of the Formula (I):
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00070
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
R1 is C1-6 alkyl;
R2a is C1-6 alkyl;
R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl;
or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group;
or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring;
R3 is absent or hydrogen; and
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00002
represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00002
is a double bond, the other
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00002
is a single bond; and when one of the
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00002
is a double bond, R3 is absent.
41. A method for treating disorders related to GABA function in a subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound or pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula (I):
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00071
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
R1 is C1-6 alkyl;
R2a is C1-6 alkyl;
R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl;
or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group;
or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring;
R3 is absent or hydrogen; and
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a double bond, the other
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a single bond; and when one of the
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a double bond, R3 is absent.
42. A method for treating a CNS-related disorder in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering to the subject an effective amount a compound of Formula (I):
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00072
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
R1 is C1-6 alkyl;
R2a is C1-6 alkyl;
R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl;
or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group;
or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring;
R3 is absent or hydrogen; and
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a double bond, the other
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a single bond; and when one of the
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a double bond, R3 is absent.
43. The method of claim 42, wherein the CNS-related disorder is a sleep disorder, a mood disorder, a schizophrenia spectrum disorder, a convulsive disorder, a disorder of memory and/or cognition, a movement disorder, a personality disorder, autism spectrum disorder, pain, traumatic brain injury, a vascular disease, a substance abuse disorder and/or withdrawal syndrome, or tinnitus.
44. The method of claim 42, wherein the compound is administered orally.
45. The method of claim 42, wherein the compound is administered intramuscularly.
46. The method of claim 42, wherein the subject is a subject with Rett syndrome, Fragile X syndrome, or Angelman syndrome.
47. The method of claim 42, wherein the CNS-related disorder is a sleep disorder, an eating disorder, a mood disorder, a schizophrenia spectrum disorder, a convulsive disorder, a disorder of memory and/or cognition, a movement disorder, a personality disorder, autism spectrum disorder, pain, traumatic brain injury, a vascular disease, a substance abuse disorder and/or withdrawal syndrome, or tinnitus.
48. The method of claim 42, wherein the CNS-related disorder is depression.
49. The method of claim 42, wherein the CNS-related disorder is tremor.
50. The method of claim 42, wherein the CNS-related disorder is an eating disorder.
51. A kit comprising a solid composition comprising a compound of Formula (I):
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00073
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
A is aryl, heterocyclyl or heteroaryl;
R1 is C1-6 alkyl;
R2a is C1-6 alkyl;
R2b is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl;
or R2a and R2b are joined to form an oxo (═O) group;
or R2a and R2b together with the carbon atom to which they are attached form a ring;
R3 is absent or hydrogen; and
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
represents a single or double bond, wherein when one of
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a double bond, the other
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a single bond; and when one of the
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-P00001
is a double bond, R3 is absent; and a sterile diluent.
52. A pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a compound of claim 1, wherein the compound is selected from:
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00074
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00075
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00076
Figure US20170233433A1-20170817-C00077
US15/519,478 2014-10-16 2015-10-16 Compositions and methods for treating cns disorders Abandoned US20170233433A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US15/519,478 US20170233433A1 (en) 2014-10-16 2015-10-16 Compositions and methods for treating cns disorders

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201462064957P 2014-10-16 2014-10-16
PCT/US2015/056066 WO2016061537A1 (en) 2014-10-16 2015-10-16 Compositions and methods for treating cns disorders
US15/519,478 US20170233433A1 (en) 2014-10-16 2015-10-16 Compositions and methods for treating cns disorders

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2015/056066 A-371-Of-International WO2016061537A1 (en) 2014-10-16 2015-10-16 Compositions and methods for treating cns disorders

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/365,123 Continuation US10870677B2 (en) 2014-10-16 2019-03-26 Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20170233433A1 true US20170233433A1 (en) 2017-08-17

Family

ID=55747454

Family Applications (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/519,478 Abandoned US20170233433A1 (en) 2014-10-16 2015-10-16 Compositions and methods for treating cns disorders
US16/365,123 Active US10870677B2 (en) 2014-10-16 2019-03-26 Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US17/112,125 Abandoned US20210087223A1 (en) 2014-10-16 2020-12-04 Compositions and methods for treating cns disorders
US18/169,964 Pending US20230192757A1 (en) 2014-10-16 2023-02-16 Compositions and methods for treating cns disorders

Family Applications After (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/365,123 Active US10870677B2 (en) 2014-10-16 2019-03-26 Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US17/112,125 Abandoned US20210087223A1 (en) 2014-10-16 2020-12-04 Compositions and methods for treating cns disorders
US18/169,964 Pending US20230192757A1 (en) 2014-10-16 2023-02-16 Compositions and methods for treating cns disorders

Country Status (18)

Country Link
US (4) US20170233433A1 (en)
EP (3) EP3753927B1 (en)
JP (3) JP6742308B2 (en)
AU (3) AU2015331597B2 (en)
CA (1) CA2964898A1 (en)
CY (1) CY1123246T1 (en)
DK (1) DK3206493T3 (en)
ES (1) ES2808855T3 (en)
HR (1) HRP20201216T1 (en)
HU (1) HUE051488T2 (en)
LT (1) LT3206493T (en)
ME (1) ME03809B (en)
NZ (1) NZ769042A (en)
PL (1) PL3206493T3 (en)
PT (1) PT3206493T (en)
RS (1) RS60642B1 (en)
SI (1) SI3206493T1 (en)
WO (1) WO2016061537A1 (en)

Cited By (22)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019055764A1 (en) * 2017-09-14 2019-03-21 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. A 19-nor c3,3-disubstituted c21-n-pyrazolyl steroid and methods of use thereof
US10342810B2 (en) 2013-04-17 2019-07-09 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. 19-nor C3, 3-disubstituted C21-N-pyrazolyl steroids and methods of use thereof
US10377790B2 (en) 2013-04-17 2019-08-13 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. 19-nor neuroactive steroids and methods of use thereof
US10391106B2 (en) 2013-04-17 2019-08-27 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. 19-nor C3, 3-disubstituted C21-C-bound heteroaryl steroids and methods of use thereof
US10426837B2 (en) 2015-01-26 2019-10-01 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US10435431B2 (en) 2011-10-14 2019-10-08 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. 3,3 disubstituted 19-nor pregnane compounds, compositions, and uses thereof
US10577390B2 (en) 2014-10-16 2020-03-03 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US10745436B2 (en) 2014-06-18 2020-08-18 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Neuroactive steroids, compositions, and uses thereof
US10774108B2 (en) 2014-11-27 2020-09-15 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US10822370B2 (en) 2013-04-17 2020-11-03 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. 19-nor neuroactive steroids and methods of use thereof
US10857163B1 (en) 2019-09-30 2020-12-08 Athenen Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions that preferentially potentiate subtypes of GABAA receptors and methods of use thereof
US10870677B2 (en) 2014-10-16 2020-12-22 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US11046728B2 (en) 2013-07-19 2021-06-29 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Neuroactive steroids, compositions, and uses thereof
US11124538B2 (en) 2015-02-20 2021-09-21 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Neuroactive steroids, compositions, and uses thereof
US11236121B2 (en) 2016-08-23 2022-02-01 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Crystalline 19-nor C3,3-disubstituted C21-N-pyrazolyl steroid
US11396525B2 (en) 2016-07-11 2022-07-26 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. C17, C20, and C21 substituted neuroactive steroids and their methods of use
US11498940B2 (en) 2013-08-23 2022-11-15 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Neuroactive steroids, compositions, and uses thereof
US11643434B2 (en) 2019-05-31 2023-05-09 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Neuroactive steroids and compositions thereof
US11993628B2 (en) 2016-07-11 2024-05-28 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. C7, C12, and C16 substituted neuroactive steroids and their methods of use
US12048706B2 (en) 2012-08-21 2024-07-30 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of treating epilepsy or status epilepticus
US12060386B2 (en) 2017-12-08 2024-08-13 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US12083131B2 (en) 2014-09-08 2024-09-10 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Neuroactive steroids, compositions, and uses thereof

Families Citing this family (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DK3149018T3 (en) * 2014-05-29 2020-07-20 Sage Therapeutics Inc NEUROACTIVE STEROIDS, COMPOSITIONS AND USE THEREOF
US20210228596A1 (en) * 2017-10-12 2021-07-29 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Method of treating cns disorders with neurosteroids and gabaergic compounds
CN117946202A (en) * 2017-12-22 2024-04-30 萨奇治疗股份有限公司 Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
EP3737687A1 (en) 2018-01-12 2020-11-18 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Aza-, oxa and thia-pregnan-20-one-3.alpha.-ol compounds for use in treating cns disorders
EP3750909A4 (en) 2018-02-11 2022-03-02 Jiangsu Hansoh Pharmaceutical Group Co., Ltd. Steroid derivative regulators, method for preparing the same, and uses thereof
BR112020016269A2 (en) * 2018-02-11 2020-12-15 Jiangsu Hansoh Pharmaceutical Group Co., Ltd. STEROID DERIVED REGULATORS, METHOD TO PREPARE THEM AND THEIR USES
SG11202012344RA (en) * 2018-06-12 2021-01-28 Sage Therapeutics Inc A 19-nor c3,3-disubstituted c21 -n-pyrazolyl steroid and methods of use thereof
CN109503694A (en) * 2018-11-21 2019-03-22 苏州闻天医药科技有限公司 A kind of novel GABAAReceptor modulators and application thereof
WO2021023213A1 (en) 2019-08-07 2021-02-11 上海翰森生物医药科技有限公司 Salt and crystal form of steroid derivative regulator
IL296371A (en) * 2020-03-18 2022-11-01 Sage Therapeutics Inc Neuroactive steroids and their methods of use
IL296645A (en) 2020-03-25 2022-11-01 Sage Therapeutics Inc Use of agents for treatment of respiratory conditions
CN116685320A (en) * 2020-10-17 2023-09-01 康奈尔大学 Methods for controlling and predicting recovery after NMBA administration

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2013056181A1 (en) * 2011-10-14 2013-04-18 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. 3,3 disubstituted 19-nor pregnane compounds, compositions, and uses thereof

Family Cites Families (114)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2856415A (en) 1957-11-13 1958-10-14 Searle & Co 3,19-dihydroxy-5-androstene derivatives
FR1380417A (en) 1962-05-15 1964-12-04 Roussel Uclaf Novel androstanyl-pyrazoles and method of preparation
US3206459A (en) 1962-10-19 1965-09-14 Syntex Corp 10alpha-pregnan-19-ol derivatives
US3169134A (en) 1963-03-21 1965-02-09 Searle & Co 2, 3-oxygenated-17alpha-methyl-5alpha-androstan-17beta-ols
BE754111A (en) 1969-07-29 1971-01-29 Upjohn Co NEW 7ALPHA- AND 7BETA-METHYL-3ALPHA, 5ALPHA- CYCLOANDROSTANES AND SIMILAR 19-NOR COMPOUNDS AND THEIR PREPARATION PROCESS
US3943124A (en) 1970-12-17 1976-03-09 Gordon Hanley Phillipps Chemical compounds
GB1380246A (en) 1970-12-17 1975-01-08 Glaxo Lab Ltd 3alpha-hydroxy-androstanes and esters thereof
GB1434919A (en) 1972-06-15 1976-05-12 Glaxo Lab Ltd 3alpha-hydroxy androstanes
GB1430942A (en) 1972-05-05 1976-04-07 Glaxo Lab Ltd 21-substituted 3alpha-hydroxy pregnanes
US3983111A (en) 1972-05-05 1976-09-28 Glaxo Laboratories Limited Steroidal anaesthetics of the pregnane and 19-norpregnane series
GB1436324A (en) 1972-05-12 1976-05-19 Glaxo Lab Ltd Anaesthetic 3alpha-hydroxy pregnanes
DK134348C (en) 1973-11-30 1977-03-21 Schering Ag ANALOGICAL PROCEDURE FOR MAKING D-HOMO-20 KETOPREGNARS
US4071625A (en) 1974-05-13 1978-01-31 Richardson-Merrell Inc. 19-Oxygenated-5α-androstanes for the enhancement of libido
DE2438020A1 (en) 1974-08-05 1976-02-26 Schering Ag 18-METHYL-19-NOR-20-KETO-PREGNANE AND THE METHOD OF MANUFACTURING IT
IL48628A0 (en) 1974-12-23 1976-02-29 Schering Ag D-homo-20-keto-pregnanes and process for their manufactur
DE2526373C2 (en) 1975-06-11 1983-11-10 Schering AG, 1000 Berlin und 4709 Bergkamen Process for the preparation of Δ → 9 → → (→ → 1 → → 1 → →) → -5? -20-keto steroids
GB1570394A (en) 1976-01-06 1980-07-02 Glaxo Lab Ltd 11-acyloxy-3-hydroxy steroids
US4192871A (en) 1976-01-06 1980-03-11 Glaxo Laboratories Limited Chemical compounds
GB1581234A (en) 1976-04-05 1980-12-10 Glaxo Operations Ltd 11a - amino - 3a - hydroxysteroids
DE2632677A1 (en) 1976-07-16 1978-01-26 Schering Ag PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF ANDROSTANE-17-ONE DERIVATIVES AND THEIR USE
GB1581235A (en) 1977-04-04 1980-12-10 Glaxo Operations Ltd 11a-amino-3a-hydroxy-steroids
US4389345A (en) 1981-10-09 1983-06-21 G.D. Searle & Co. 3-Oxoestra-17-acetonitrile and unsaturated analogs
US4495102A (en) 1982-09-03 1985-01-22 G. D. Searle & Co. Aminoalkyl steroids
US5120723A (en) 1987-08-25 1992-06-09 University Of Southern California Method, compositions, and compounds for modulating brain excitability
US5319115A (en) 1987-08-25 1994-06-07 Cocensys Inc. Method for making 3α-hydroxy, 3β-substituted-pregnanes
US5232917A (en) 1987-08-25 1993-08-03 University Of Southern California Methods, compositions, and compounds for allosteric modulation of the GABA receptor by members of the androstane and pregnane series
US5376645A (en) 1990-01-23 1994-12-27 University Of Kansas Derivatives of cyclodextrins exhibiting enhanced aqueous solubility and the use thereof
CA2118938A1 (en) 1991-09-13 1993-04-01 Kelvin W. Gee Novel gabaa receptor with steroid binding sites
DE4232681C2 (en) 1992-09-29 1994-11-24 Sigma Tau Ind Farmaceuti 17-phenyl and 17-furyl-14beta, 5alpha-androstane and androsten derivatives, processes for their preparation and pharmaceutical composition containing them
AU698834B2 (en) * 1993-05-24 1998-11-12 Purdue Pharma Ltd. Methods and compositions for inducing sleep
CZ300694A3 (en) 1993-12-02 1996-05-15 Akzo Nobel Nv Substituted 2beta-morpholinandrostane derivatives, process of their preparation, their use for preparing pharmaceutical preparations and pharmaceutical compositions containing thereof
EP0656365B1 (en) 1993-12-02 1997-04-09 Akzo Nobel N.V. Substituted 2beta-morpholinoandrostane derivatives
DE69518509T2 (en) 1994-02-14 2001-04-19 Euro-Celtique S.A., Luxemburg/Luxembourg ANDROSTANE AND PREGNANE FOR ALLOSTERIC MODULATION OF THE GABA RECEPTOR
US5939545A (en) 1994-02-14 1999-08-17 Cocensys, Inc. Method, compositions, and compounds for allosteric modulation of the gaba receptor by members of the androstane and pregnane series
WO1996003421A1 (en) 1994-07-21 1996-02-08 Pharmacia & Upjohn Company Neurologically active aminosteroids
UA48154C2 (en) 1994-11-23 2002-08-15 Косенсіз Інк. COMPOUNDS OF ANDROSTANE AND PREGNANE FAMILY FOR ALLOSTERIC MODULATION OF g-AMINOBUTYRIC ACID
NZ310850A (en) 1995-06-06 1999-07-29 Cocensys Inc 3 alpha hydroxy(17)-unsubstituted derivatives of androstane and 21 substituted derivatives of the pregnane series and medicaments
AU3967297A (en) * 1996-08-01 1998-02-25 Cocensys, Inc. Use of gaba and nmda receptor ligands for the treatment of migraine headache
US5994334A (en) 1997-02-05 1999-11-30 University Of Maryland Androgen synthesis inhibitors
US5935545A (en) 1997-07-11 1999-08-10 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Process for producing an aqueous solution comprising ferric chloride
UA73736C2 (en) 1999-04-29 2005-09-15 Euro Celtic S A Method for alleviating or preventing insomnia and inducing anesthesia
US7018406B2 (en) 1999-11-17 2006-03-28 Corevalve Sa Prosthetic valve for transluminal delivery
DE60111304T2 (en) 2000-02-18 2005-11-10 Taiho Pharmaceutical Co. Ltd. PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF STEROID DERIVATIVES
US6855836B2 (en) 2000-10-26 2005-02-15 Jenapharm Gmbh & Co. Kg 17-Methylene steroids, process for their production and pharmaceutical compositions that contain these compounds
DE60128251T2 (en) 2000-11-03 2008-01-10 Washington University Oestrone derivatives with cell protective effect
GR1003861B (en) 2000-12-29 2002-04-11 Novel gabaa modulating neurosteroids
DK1608671T3 (en) 2003-03-24 2010-05-10 Sterix Ltd Estrogen derivatives as inhibitors of steroid sulfatase
WO2005000869A1 (en) 2003-05-29 2005-01-06 Washington University Neuroactive 13,24-cyclo-18,21-dinorcholanes and structurally-related pentacyclic steroids
US20070099880A1 (en) 2003-11-24 2007-05-03 Blizzard Timothy A Estrogen receptor modulators
US20090118248A1 (en) 2004-04-23 2009-05-07 Euro-Celtique S.A. 3-Alpha-hydroxy 21-n-heteroaryl-pregnane derivatives for modulation of brain excitability and a process for the production thereof
WO2006037016A2 (en) 2004-09-27 2006-04-06 The Regents Of The University Of California Novel therapy for treatment of chronic degenerative brain diseases and nervous system injury
US20070014719A1 (en) 2004-09-29 2007-01-18 Reading Christopher L Steroid analogs and characterization and treatment methods
EP2263675A3 (en) 2005-06-09 2011-05-18 Euro-Celtique S.A. Pharmaceutical compositions of a neuroactive steroid and uses thereof
US20090203658A1 (en) 2007-01-08 2009-08-13 Duke University Neuroactive steroid compositions and methods of use therefor
DE102007027636A1 (en) 2007-06-12 2008-12-18 Bayer Schering Pharma Aktiengesellschaft 17β-Cyano-18α-homo-19-nor-androst-4-ene derivative, its use and the derivative-containing drug
ES2589139T3 (en) 2007-06-15 2016-11-10 Research Triangle Institute Androstane and pregnan steroids with potent allosteric modulation properties of the GABA / ionophore chloride receptor complex
GB0711948D0 (en) 2007-06-20 2007-08-01 Bionature E A Ltd Neurosteriod compounds
CN101412742B (en) 2007-10-19 2013-07-31 天津金耀集团有限公司 Nitric acid ester medicament for inhibiting angiogenesis
US20090264443A1 (en) 2008-04-18 2009-10-22 David Helton Treatment of organophosphate exposure with tetrahydroindolone arylpiperazine compounds
CN101624414B (en) 2008-07-07 2013-02-13 天津金耀集团有限公司 Nitrate medicament for inhibiting angiogenesis
CZ2008434A3 (en) 2008-07-10 2009-12-09 Ústav organické chemie a biochemie Akademie ved CR, v. v. i. Pregnane anionic compounds, process for preparing thereof and their use
US20100120733A1 (en) 2008-11-07 2010-05-13 Auspex Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Steroid modulators of glucocorticoid receptor
US20110152840A1 (en) 2009-12-23 2011-06-23 Drugtech Corporation Methods for reducing the occurrence of preterm delivery and other pregnancy-related conditions
WO2012013816A1 (en) 2010-07-30 2012-02-02 Medexis S.A. Compounds and methods for treating neoplasia
EP2667876A2 (en) 2010-12-15 2013-12-04 Harbor BioSciences, Inc. Methods and compounds for preparing 3alpha-oxygen substituted steroids
CA2828047C (en) 2011-02-15 2020-03-10 Socpra Sciences Et Genie, S.E.C. Steroid alkaloids and uses thereof as antimicrobial agents against electron transport-deficient microbes and as potentiators for antimicrobial agents against pathogenic bacteria
CZ201181A3 (en) 2011-02-15 2012-09-12 Ústav organické chemie a biochemie Akademie ved CR, v.v.i. Pregnanolone derivatives substituted in position 3alpha with cationic group, process of their preparation, their use and composition containing them
US9388210B2 (en) 2011-02-25 2016-07-12 Washington University Neuroactive 17(20)-Z-vinylcyano-substituted steroids, prodrugs thereof, and methods of treatment using same
US9851309B2 (en) 2011-03-23 2017-12-26 Satoshi Watabe Ultra-high-sensitive assay of protein and nucleic acid and kit, and novel enzyme substrate
CA2843436A1 (en) 2011-07-29 2013-02-07 The Regents Of The University Of California Novel 17.beta.-heteroaryl-substituted steroids as modulators of gaba a receptors
FI2753632T3 (en) 2011-09-08 2023-08-02 Sage Therapeutics Inc Neuroactive steroids, compositions, and uses thereof
US20150175651A1 (en) 2012-06-15 2015-06-25 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Neuroactive steroids, compositions, and uses thereof
NZ703072A (en) 2012-06-19 2016-06-24 Intercept Pharmaceuticals Inc Preparation, uses and solid forms of obeticholic acid
US20140050789A1 (en) 2012-08-13 2014-02-20 The Regents Of The University Of California Mitigation of epileptic seizures by combination therapy using benzodiazepines and neurosteroids
WO2014058736A1 (en) 2012-10-08 2014-04-17 Washington University Neuroactive 19-alkoxy-17(20)-z-vinylcyano-substituted steroids, prodrugs thereof, and methods of treatment using same
WO2014071449A1 (en) 2012-11-09 2014-05-15 Goodchild Investments Pty Ltd Neuroactive steroids and their use to facilitate neuroprotection
IL278396B2 (en) 2012-12-18 2024-07-01 Washington University St Louis Neuroactive 19-alkoxy-17-substituted steroids, prodrugs thereof, and methods of treatment using same
US8939545B2 (en) 2012-12-20 2015-01-27 Eastman Kodak Company Inkjet printing with managed airflow for condensation control
CA2831054C (en) 2013-01-09 2016-08-30 Sapna Life Sciences Corp. Formulations, and methods for their use in treatment of neuropathology and neurodegeneration as a result of traumatic injury
WO2014108808A2 (en) 2013-01-09 2014-07-17 Henry James Lorne Pharmaceutical formulations for the treatment and prevention of trauma-induced neuropathology and neurodegeneration
GB201302368D0 (en) 2013-02-11 2013-03-27 Univ Bath Compound
US9512170B2 (en) 2013-03-01 2016-12-06 Washington University Neuroactive 13, 17-substituted steroids as modulators for GABA type-A receptors
US9562026B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-02-07 Washington University Neuroactive substituted cyclopent[a]anthracenes as modulators for GABA type-A receptors
US9725481B2 (en) 2013-04-17 2017-08-08 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. 19-nor C3, 3-disubstituted C21-C-bound heteroaryl steroids and methods of use thereof
WO2014169836A1 (en) 2013-04-17 2014-10-23 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. 19-nor neuroactive steroids and methods of use thereof
ES2886182T3 (en) 2013-04-17 2021-12-16 Sage Therapeutics Inc C21-N-pyrazolyl-19-nor C3,3-disubstituted steroid for use in therapy
HUE051403T2 (en) 2013-04-17 2021-03-01 Sage Therapeutics Inc 19-nor neuroactive steroids for methods of treatment
AU2014290400B2 (en) 2013-07-19 2019-12-05 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Neuroactive steroids, compositions, and uses thereof
BR112016003862B1 (en) 2013-08-23 2022-09-06 Sage Therapeutics, Inc NEUROACTIVE STEROID COMPOUNDS, THEIR COMPOSITIONS AND THEIR USES
DK3149018T3 (en) 2014-05-29 2020-07-20 Sage Therapeutics Inc NEUROACTIVE STEROIDS, COMPOSITIONS AND USE THEREOF
US10246482B2 (en) 2014-06-18 2019-04-02 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Neuroactive steroids, compositions, and uses thereof
WO2016036724A1 (en) 2014-09-02 2016-03-10 The Texas A&M University System Method of treating organophosphate intoxication
ME03809B (en) 2014-10-16 2021-04-20 Sage Therapeutics Inc Compositions and methods for treating cns disorders
WO2016061527A1 (en) 2014-10-16 2016-04-21 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating cns disorders
RS60343B1 (en) 2014-11-27 2020-07-31 Sage Therapeutics Inc Compositions and methods for treating cns disorders
ES2857082T3 (en) 2015-01-26 2021-09-28 Sage Therapeutics Inc Compositions and methods for the treatment of CNS disorders
CN105985396A (en) 2015-02-16 2016-10-05 苏州泽璟生物制药有限公司 Deuterated chenodeoxycholic acid derivative and pharmaceutical composition containing same
EP4155314A1 (en) 2015-02-20 2023-03-29 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Neuroactive steroids, compositions, and uses thereof
UY36741A (en) 2015-06-21 2016-12-30 Prevacus Inc COMPOSITE OF STEROID C-20, ITS COMPOSITIONS AND USES TO TREAT TRAUMATIC BRAIN INJURY (TBI), WHICH INCLUDES BRAIN CONMOTIONS
EP3347368A4 (en) 2015-09-08 2019-01-23 Viewpoint Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds and formulations for treating ophthalmic diseases
CN108135838A (en) 2015-10-16 2018-06-08 马瑞纳斯制药公司 Injectable neurosteroid preparation comprising nanoparticle
WO2017087864A1 (en) 2015-11-20 2017-05-26 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds and methods of their use
BR112018067998A2 (en) 2016-03-08 2019-04-16 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. neuroactive steroids, compositions and uses of these
US10226550B2 (en) 2016-03-11 2019-03-12 Brigham Young University Cationic steroidal antimicrobial compositions for the treatment of dermal tissue
ES2965214T3 (en) 2016-07-11 2024-04-11 Sage Therapeutics Inc Neuroactive steroids substituted at C17, C20 and C21 and their use procedures
AU2017296295B2 (en) 2016-07-11 2022-02-24 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. C7, C12, and C16 substituted neuroactive steroids and their methods of use
CN115974954A (en) 2016-08-23 2023-04-18 萨奇治疗股份有限公司 Crystal of 19-nor C3, 3-disubstituted C21-N-pyrazolylsterols
US10391105B2 (en) 2016-09-09 2019-08-27 Marinus Pharmaceuticals Inc. Methods of treating certain depressive disorders and delirium tremens
CN108727453A (en) 2017-04-20 2018-11-02 华东理工大学 Novel PD-1 inhibitor and its application
WO2019018119A1 (en) 2017-07-18 2019-01-24 Pairnomix, Llc Methods of treating epilepsy and kcnti related conditions
JP7196157B2 (en) 2017-08-31 2022-12-26 武田薬品工業株式会社 Treatment of CNS conditions
SG11202002085YA (en) 2017-09-07 2020-04-29 Sage Therapeutics Inc Neuroactive steroids and their methods of use
KR20200085837A (en) 2017-11-10 2020-07-15 마리누스 파마슈티컬스 인코포레이티드 Use of ganasolone for use in the treatment of genetic epilepsy
WO2019211668A2 (en) 2018-05-04 2019-11-07 Acerus Pharmaceuticals Corporation Neurosteroid derivatives and uses thereof

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2013056181A1 (en) * 2011-10-14 2013-04-18 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. 3,3 disubstituted 19-nor pregnane compounds, compositions, and uses thereof

Cited By (35)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10435431B2 (en) 2011-10-14 2019-10-08 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. 3,3 disubstituted 19-nor pregnane compounds, compositions, and uses thereof
US12048706B2 (en) 2012-08-21 2024-07-30 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of treating epilepsy or status epilepticus
US11912737B2 (en) 2013-04-17 2024-02-27 Sage Therpeutics, Inc. 19-nor neuroactive steroids and methods of use thereof
US10342810B2 (en) 2013-04-17 2019-07-09 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. 19-nor C3, 3-disubstituted C21-N-pyrazolyl steroids and methods of use thereof
US10377790B2 (en) 2013-04-17 2019-08-13 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. 19-nor neuroactive steroids and methods of use thereof
US10391106B2 (en) 2013-04-17 2019-08-27 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. 19-nor C3, 3-disubstituted C21-C-bound heteroaryl steroids and methods of use thereof
US11344563B2 (en) 2013-04-17 2022-05-31 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. 19-nor C3, 3-disubstituted C21-C-bound heteroaryl steroids and methods of use thereof
US11261211B2 (en) 2013-04-17 2022-03-01 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. 19-NOR neuroactive steroids and methods of use thereof
US11241446B2 (en) 2013-04-17 2022-02-08 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. 19-nor C3, 3-disubstituted C21-N-pyrazolyl steroids and methods of use thereof
US10822370B2 (en) 2013-04-17 2020-11-03 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. 19-nor neuroactive steroids and methods of use thereof
US11046728B2 (en) 2013-07-19 2021-06-29 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Neuroactive steroids, compositions, and uses thereof
US11498940B2 (en) 2013-08-23 2022-11-15 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Neuroactive steroids, compositions, and uses thereof
US11780875B2 (en) 2014-06-18 2023-10-10 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Neuroactive steroids, compositions, and uses thereof
US10745436B2 (en) 2014-06-18 2020-08-18 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Neuroactive steroids, compositions, and uses thereof
US12083131B2 (en) 2014-09-08 2024-09-10 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Neuroactive steroids, compositions, and uses thereof
US11530237B2 (en) 2014-10-16 2022-12-20 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US12065463B2 (en) 2014-10-16 2024-08-20 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US10870677B2 (en) 2014-10-16 2020-12-22 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US10577390B2 (en) 2014-10-16 2020-03-03 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US11542297B2 (en) 2014-10-16 2023-01-03 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US10774108B2 (en) 2014-11-27 2020-09-15 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US11945836B2 (en) 2014-11-27 2024-04-02 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US11147877B2 (en) 2015-01-26 2021-10-19 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US10426837B2 (en) 2015-01-26 2019-10-01 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US11124538B2 (en) 2015-02-20 2021-09-21 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Neuroactive steroids, compositions, and uses thereof
US11396525B2 (en) 2016-07-11 2022-07-26 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. C17, C20, and C21 substituted neuroactive steroids and their methods of use
US11993628B2 (en) 2016-07-11 2024-05-28 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. C7, C12, and C16 substituted neuroactive steroids and their methods of use
US11236121B2 (en) 2016-08-23 2022-02-01 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Crystalline 19-nor C3,3-disubstituted C21-N-pyrazolyl steroid
US11884696B2 (en) 2016-08-23 2024-01-30 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Crystalline 19-nor C3,3-disubstituted C21-n-pyrazolyl steroid
WO2019055764A1 (en) * 2017-09-14 2019-03-21 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. A 19-nor c3,3-disubstituted c21-n-pyrazolyl steroid and methods of use thereof
US12060386B2 (en) 2017-12-08 2024-08-13 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US11643434B2 (en) 2019-05-31 2023-05-09 Sage Therapeutics, Inc. Neuroactive steroids and compositions thereof
US11571432B2 (en) 2019-09-30 2023-02-07 Eliem Therapeutics (UK) Ltd Compositions that preferentially potentiate subtypes of GABAA receptors and methods of use thereof
US11090314B2 (en) 2019-09-30 2021-08-17 Eliem Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions that preferentially potentiate subtypes of GABAA receptors and methods of use thereof
US10857163B1 (en) 2019-09-30 2020-12-08 Athenen Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions that preferentially potentiate subtypes of GABAA receptors and methods of use thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
HUE051488T2 (en) 2021-03-01
EP4275748A2 (en) 2023-11-15
RS60642B1 (en) 2020-09-30
JP7085592B2 (en) 2022-06-16
AU2015331597B2 (en) 2020-04-30
ES2808855T3 (en) 2021-03-02
EP3206493A4 (en) 2018-04-04
HRP20201216T1 (en) 2020-12-11
AU2015331597A1 (en) 2017-05-11
US10870677B2 (en) 2020-12-22
JP2020183434A (en) 2020-11-12
US20230192757A1 (en) 2023-06-22
EP3753927B1 (en) 2023-07-19
PL3206493T3 (en) 2021-01-25
EP3206493A1 (en) 2017-08-23
JP2017531020A (en) 2017-10-19
PT3206493T (en) 2020-08-03
JP7510461B2 (en) 2024-07-03
LT3206493T (en) 2020-08-25
US20210087223A1 (en) 2021-03-25
JP6742308B2 (en) 2020-08-19
ME03809B (en) 2021-04-20
NZ769042A (en) 2023-12-22
EP4275748A3 (en) 2024-01-03
NZ731095A (en) 2023-12-22
US20200024301A1 (en) 2020-01-23
AU2020207810B2 (en) 2022-02-24
WO2016061537A1 (en) 2016-04-21
EP3753927A1 (en) 2020-12-23
CY1123246T1 (en) 2021-10-29
DK3206493T3 (en) 2020-08-10
EP3206493B1 (en) 2020-05-06
SI3206493T1 (en) 2020-10-30
AU2022203444B2 (en) 2024-03-14
JP2022116318A (en) 2022-08-09
CA2964898A1 (en) 2016-04-21
AU2022203444A1 (en) 2022-06-09
AU2020207810A1 (en) 2020-08-06

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10870677B2 (en) Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US12065463B2 (en) Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US12071453B2 (en) Neuroactive steroids, compositions, and uses thereof
US11147877B2 (en) Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US10774108B2 (en) Compositions and methods for treating CNS disorders
US20210363175A1 (en) 9(11)-unsaturated neuroactive steroids and their methods of use

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION